JP6034939B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, predetermined identification information (also referred to as “identification symbol” or “display symbol”) is updated or displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (LCD). There are a number of games that have been enhanced by a so-called variable display game, in which variable display is made variable so that a predetermined game value is given based on the display result.

  Some variable display games are played by using the above display device as an image display device. In such a variable display game, the variation of the identification information is started based on the detection of the game ball passing through the start winning opening (the execution condition of the variable display is established), and the display when the variation of the identification information is completely stopped A game in which the case of the result (determined symbol) is a specific display mode is a “big hit”. When a “big hit” occurs in the variable display game, a special electric combination called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state in which a game ball can be won extremely easily is provided to a player for a certain period of time. This state is referred to as “specific game state” or “hit game state”.

  Such a gaming machine has been proposed in which the main control circuit determines the chance of temporary stop display before the symbol actually selected based on the variation pattern command is stopped and displayed by the sub control circuit ( For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-204780 A

  According to the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that the interest of the game is impaired.

  This invention is made in view of the said actual condition, and it aims at providing the game machine which can prevent the interest of a game falling.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the claims of the present application performs variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.), and is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, etc.) ) Controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and a determination means (for example, a part for which the CPU 111 executes the process of step S226) for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state, Variable display pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variable display patterns in which a variable display mode of information is defined (for example, ROM 112 of the game control microcomputer 100), and any one of the variable display patterns is selected from the plurality of variable display patterns. Variable display pattern selection means to select (for example, CPU 111 that executes the variation pattern setting process in step S111) , Variable display control means for variably displaying the identification information in accordance with the variable display pattern selected by the variable display pattern selection means (for example, CPU 111 for executing the processes of steps S112 and S113, CPU 131 for executing the processes of steps S162 and S163, etc. And the variable display pattern selection means determines that the determination means does not control the advantageous state in the variable display of the identification information executed a predetermined number of times after that when the specific mode is derived and displayed. Based on this, a variable display pattern is continuously selected from a specific variable display pattern group having fewer types of variable display patterns than the plurality of variable display patterns (see, for example, FIGS. 14 and 18) and identified. The information is variably displayed on the variable display section of the plurality of columns, And special identification information to form a Driven string by be displayed side by side identification information indicating different character each other in part, be identification information other than the special identification information, the variable display portion of the plurality of rows Normal identification information that becomes a specific display result by displaying the same identification information side by side, and in the first variable display unit from which the identification information is derived and displayed first among the plurality of columns of variable display units When the normal identification information is derived and displayed, the first derivation display control means for performing the derivation display of the identification information in the plurality of columns of the variable display unit in the first derivation display order and the first variable display unit When the special identification information is derived and displayed, the identification information can be derived and displayed on the variable display section of the plurality of columns in a second derived display order different from the first derived display order. 2 derivation display control means, After the identification information is first derived and displayed on the first variable display unit, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect before the variable information display result of the identification information is derived and displayed. And a special derivation display control means for deriving and displaying the special identification information at a higher rate than the normal identification information in a second variable display unit different from the first variable display unit when executed. .
According to such a structure, it can prevent that the interest of a game falls.
The identification information includes specific identification information and non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information, and the advantageous state controlled when the specific display result is derived and displayed by the specific identification information is When the specific display result is derived and displayed with non-specific identification information, the player is controlled more advantageously than the advantageous state, and when the non-specific identification information is derived and displayed, the specific identification information is temporarily stored. The stop display may not be performed.

(2) Alternatively, the gaming machine according to the present application may be configured after a start condition (for example, the processing of step S203 to step S207 has been executed based on the determination of Yes in step S201 and the determination of No in step S202). A plurality of columns of variable display units that variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, etc.) that can each be identified based on the establishment of a start condition (for example, No is determined in step S221). (E.g., "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.), and a variable display of identification information derived and displayed by the plural columns of variable display portions After the result becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination), the specific gaming state (for example, large game) advantageous to the player Identification information that is variably displayed on the variable display section of the plurality of columns, the identification information that is variably displayed on the variable display section of the plurality of columns is included in all of the variable display sections of the plurality of columns. Special identification information that has a specific meaning by displaying different identification information side by side (for example, a decorative pattern with a symbol number “9”, etc.) is included, and the identification information is the first in the variable display section of the plurality of columns. After the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first variable display section that is derived and displayed, the special identification information is temporarily stopped on any variable display section other than the first variable display section among the variable display sections of the plurality of columns. Depending on whether it is displayed, a plurality of types of special effects (for example, “main slip” effect display by one of the main slip patterns MS1-1 to MS1-3, or “May Mei” by the main slip pattern MS2-1). After the CPU 131 executes the process of step S640 by the determination of Yes in step S636 based on the variation pattern determined by the CPU 111 in step S253, the CPU 131 executes the process of step S640. The process of step S517 is executed, and any of the process of step ST41 to step ST49, the process of step ST61 to step ST70, the process of step ST81 to step ST90, the process of step ST101 to step ST111, or the process of step ST121 to step ST131 Or the like).
According to such a configuration, after the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion among the variable display portions of the plurality of rows, the special identification information is displayed on any one other than the first variable display portion. When it is derived and displayed, one of a plurality of special effects can be executed. Thus, even when identification information other than special identification information is derived and displayed on a part of the variable display portion of the plurality of columns, it is possible to execute a special effect, and after a variable display of identification information is started, a game can be performed in a short period of time. It can prevent the interest from deteriorating. In addition, depending on the variable display unit from which the special identification information is derived and displayed, the special effects can be executed in various effects by changing the effects in the special effects, thereby enhancing the effects in the special effects. .

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (2), when the identification information other than the special identification information is derived and displayed on the first variable display section, the variable display of the identification information on the variable display section of the plurality of columns is first When the special identification information is derived and displayed by the first derivation display control means performed in the derivation display order and the first variable display section, the variable display of the identification information on the variable display section of the plurality of columns is displayed in the first derivation. When a special effect is executed by the second derivation display control means performed in the second derivation display order different from the display order, and the effect display execution means, the second variable display part is different from the first variable display part. Special derivation display control means for deriving and displaying the special identification information at a higher rate than the identification information other than the special identification information, and the effect display executing means is the first variable display section, the identification information first Derived display After it may be configured to perform the special effect before the variable display results of the identification information is derived displayed. It should be noted that prior determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 111 executes the process of step S226) that determines whether or not to control the specific gaming state before the variable display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, Reach determination means (for example, the CPU 111 executes the process of step S246) for determining whether or not the identification information is derived and displayed in the reach display state when the pre-determination means determines that the game state is not controlled to the specific gaming state. A variation pattern type determination unit (for example, the CPU 111 performs a step of determining the variation pattern type of the identification information to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result by the prior determination unit and the determination result by the reach determination unit). And the variation determined by the variation pattern type determining means. (For example, CPU111 portion such that executes step S253) variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of the identification information may be a from a variation pattern included in the turn type.
In such a configuration, when special identification information is derived and displayed on the first variable display unit, the identification information is variably displayed in a second derived display order different from the first derived display order. When executed, the special identification information can be derived and displayed at a higher rate than the other identification information on the second variable display unit different from the first variable display unit. Note that the variation pattern type determination unit may determine the variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result by the prior determination unit and the determination result by the reach determination unit. Then, the variation pattern determination unit may determine the variation pattern of the identification information from the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination unit. Thereby, since the determination ratio of the variation pattern type and the determination ratio of the variation pattern can be set separately, the design change related to the distribution of the variation pattern type and the variation pattern can be easily performed.

(4) In the gaming machine of the above (2) or (3), after the special identification information is derived and displayed in a reach display state in a part of the variable display units of the plurality of columns, the moving image is used. You may provide the reach production execution means (for example, the part which CPU131 performs the process of step ST146, step ST168, etc.) which performs a reach production.
In such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the game by enhancing the effect when the special identification information is derived and displayed in the reach display state.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4), when the special identification information is derived and displayed on a part of the variable display units included in the variable display units of the plurality of columns, the special identification information is displayed. As the variable display part from which the derivation display is performed, derived display mode control means (for example, variation patterns PC3-1, PC4, etc.) for performing the derivation display of the special identification information by any one of a plurality of types of derivation display modes including different variable display units. -1 and PC5-1, the CPU 131 executes the processing of step ST143 and step ST144, while when it is any of the variation patterns PC3-2, PC4-2, PC5-2, the CPU 131 A portion for executing the processing of step ST163 and step ST164 may be provided.
In such a configuration, the special identification information can be derived and displayed in various display modes to improve the interest of the game.

(6) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (5), when a predetermined effect display including displaying and displaying the identification information in the reach display state is not executed, the special identification information is not derived and displayed. Special derivation display restriction means (for example, a part where the CPU 131 executes the processing of steps S603 to S606 based on the determination of Yes in step S602) may be provided.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's feeling of joy when the special identification information is derived and displayed.

(7) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (6), a specific display result is obtained as the number of variable display units for deriving and displaying special identification information among the plurality of columns of variable display units increases. In order to increase the probability, the identification information determining means for determining the identification information to be derived and displayed on the variable display section of the plurality of columns (for example, based on the variation pattern determined by the CPU 111 in step S253, the CPU 131 ends in step S501. There may be provided a part for executing the stop symbol determination process, a part for executing the changing effect determination process in step S502, and the like.
In such a configuration, when the identification information is sequentially derived and displayed, the expectation that is the specific display result can be increased stepwise to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the decoration pattern variably displayed by an image display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes and the sudden chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern classification setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a non-reach loss variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach loss variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a block diagram showing various configuration examples in the effect control board. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a pseudo | simulation continuous 1 time execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eye determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table selection setting and stop symbol setting in pseudo continuous time. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a sub slip execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main slip pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the temporary stop symbol determination table before a slip. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the temporary stop symbol determination table before a slip. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as an effect control pattern table. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a final stop symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change production | presentation determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo | simulation continuous temporary stop symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the temporary stop symbol determination process before a slip. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control command processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display control command process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production operation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the effect display in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production operation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the effect display in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production operation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the effect display in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production operation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the effect display in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production operation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the effect display in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production operation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the effect display in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production operation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the effect display in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production operation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the effect display in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production operation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the effect display in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as various control boards in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A special symbol display device 4 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). The special symbol display device 4 is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like, and is included in a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. The symbol (also called “special symbol”) is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). For example, the special symbol display device 4 variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. The special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 4 are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the one to be turned on and the one to be turned off are different may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various images (effect images) used for the effect operation. In the display area of the image display device 5, in response to variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 4 in the special symbol game, for example, in a decorative symbol display unit which becomes a variable display unit divided into a plurality of parts such as three The decorative symbols and the like included in a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from the special symbols are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative symbols is also an example of a variable display game.

  In this embodiment, in the display area of the image display device 5, three rows of decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in “left”, “middle”, and “right”. That is, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a plurality of rows of decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, in response to the start of the change of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 4 in the special symbol game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R The decoration pattern change (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) that result in the variable display of decorative symbols are displayed side by side and stopped (completely stopped). The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are movable within the display area of the image display device 5, and display the decorative symbols in a reduced or enlarged manner. You may be able to do that. When a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses with a special symbol or decorative symbol completely stopped, the display result in the variable display of each symbol is displayed determinately, and thereafter, the variable display of this time does not proceed. The display state is such that the player can recognize this. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is completely stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, the variation speed of the decorative pattern is “0”. Thus, the decorative design is stopped and displayed, and for example, there may be a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped only for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Stopping and displaying the display symbol to the extent that the player can recognize that the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not progressing like the complete stop display or the temporary stop display is also referred to as a derivation display.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, a plurality of types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, a plurality of types of character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image indicating a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure). In addition to the plurality of types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. As an example, in this embodiment, nine types of left symbols as shown in FIG. 2A are variably displayed as decorative symbols on the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L, and “middle” decorative symbol display is displayed. In the section 5C, nine types of middle symbols as shown in FIG. 2B are variably displayed as decorative symbols, and in the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R, nine types as shown in FIG. 2C. The right symbol is variably displayed as a decorative symbol. Corresponding symbol numbers are assigned to the decorative symbols that are the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, respectively.

  Among the left symbols shown in FIG. 2 (A), the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “1” to “8” are displayed image portions indicating numbers “1” to “8” corresponding to the symbol numbers; It includes a display image part (shaded part) showing different characters according to the symbol number. Among the left symbols, the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” is the portion of the display image indicating the character “Large” and the portion of the display image indicating the character corresponding to the left symbol whose symbol number is “9” ( The shaded area). Among the middle symbols shown in FIG. 2 (B), decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “1” to “8” are displayed image portions indicating numbers “1” to “8” corresponding to the symbol numbers; It includes a display image part (shaded part) showing different characters according to the symbol number. Among the middle symbols, the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” includes a portion of the display image indicating the character “T” and a portion of the display image indicating the character corresponding to the middle symbol whose symbol number is “9” ( The shaded area). Among the right symbols shown in FIG. 2 (C), the decorative symbols having symbol numbers “1” to “8” are displayed image portions indicating numbers “1” to “8” corresponding to the symbol numbers; It includes a display image part (shaded part) showing different characters according to the symbol number. Among the right symbols, the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” is the portion of the display image indicating the character “RI” and the portion of the display image indicating the character corresponding to the right symbol whose symbol number is “9” ( The hatched portion). Here, the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8” only need to indicate the same numbers and characters in the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” only needs to indicate different characters and characters in the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” is displayed side by side in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, for example, “large”. , “To”, “ri” (big hit), etc., so long as it has a unique meaning, it only has to be configured to include characters constituting different identification information.

  When changing the decorative symbol, all of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “9” are scroll-displayed, for example, from the larger symbol number to the smaller symbol symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L. In the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5C and 5R, scroll display is performed from the smallest symbol number to the largest symbol number. In the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” is displayed after the decorative symbol having the symbol number “1” is displayed. Fluctuation display is performed. In the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5C and 5R, after displaying the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9”, the decorative symbol having the symbol number “1” is displayed. A continuous variation display of the decorative design is performed.

  Further, a special symbol start storage display area may be provided in the display area of the image display device 5. In the special symbol start memory display area, the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in the special game is based on the game ball entering (start winning prize) into the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6. Is displayed in a special figure hold storage display. Here, when the game ball enters the start winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6 (start winning prize), a start condition (““ The execution condition is also established, but it is variable because the variable display game based on the previously established variable display start condition is being executed or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the start condition for starting the display game is not satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is suspended. In the special symbol start memory display area, a winning display is performed in response to an effective start winning when the special figure reservation storage number is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). As a specific example, when 1 is added to the special figure reservation storage number, one of the display parts that are normally blue or non-displayed (for example, the left or lower end of the display part that is blue or non-displayed) Is changed to red display or visible display. On the other hand, when the special figure hold storage number is subtracted by 1, one of the display parts displayed in red or visible (for example, the right or upper end of the display part displayed in red or visible display). Return the display area to blue or non-display.

  In the special symbol start memory display area, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. You may make it provide the indicator (special symbol start memory display) which displays the number of special symbol reservation memory together with the special symbol start memory display area or instead of the special symbol start memory display area. In the example shown in FIG. 1, a special figure hold display device 25 </ b> A for displaying the special figure hold storage number in an identifiable manner is provided on the upper part of the special symbol display device 4. The special figure holding indicator 25A includes, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit value (for example, “4”) in the special figure holding memory number, and is started by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6 The number of special figure holding memories as the number of effective winning balls won in the winning opening is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6 is provided. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 that is used for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a starting prize opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the game ball is in a normally open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the starting winning hole. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, so that the game ball is in an expanded and open state in which it is easy to enter the start winning opening. In this embodiment, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6 can enter the starting winning opening even when in the normally open state, but can enter the game ball more than when in the expanded open state. It is comprised so that property may become low. A game ball that has entered (started winning) the starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is detected by, for example, the starting opening switch 22 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the start switch 22, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the special figure holding memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). If so, a start condition for executing variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is established.

  A special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is provided below the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. 3, and is opened (first state) and closed by the large winning opening door. A big winning opening that changes to (second state) is formed. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening. The game ball that has entered the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like as in the special symbol display device 4 and is included in a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol (“common symbol”). Alternatively, it is also displayed (variable display) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> B is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, one or more general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member may be provided. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. A lower plate for storing game balls that cannot be held on the upper plate is provided below the upper plate.

  In the normal game by the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined variable display time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is completely stopped and displayed. The variable symbol display time may be determined as one of a plurality of variable display times by, for example, extracting numerical data indicating a predetermined random value at the start of each normal game. . If a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol that becomes a variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is It becomes "per ordinary figure". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the expansion / release control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is in the tilting position, for a predetermined time. When elapses, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  In the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, the starting condition is established, for example, when the game ball that has entered the starting winning port formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6 is detected by the starting port switch 22 shown in FIG. Thereafter, the process is started when the variable display start condition is satisfied. The variable display start condition is satisfied when the current special figure game can be started, for example, when the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state is completed. In the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, when a predetermined variable display time elapses after the variable symbol special display is started, the fixed special symbol as a special symbol variable display result is completely stopped and displayed. The variable symbol display time of the special symbol is, for example, numerical data indicating a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern type as shown in FIG. 7 or numerical data indicating a random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern at the start of each special symbol game. Corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the above, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variable display times. If a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the special display result is a “big hit”, and a special symbol other than the big bonus symbol (losing) If the symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes “losing” as a non-specific display result. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and the symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "1", "3", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols that indicate the numbers "3" and "7" are 15 round jackpot symbols, and the number "1" The special symbol indicating is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. The other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, the special symbol variation time (special diagram variation time) in the special figure game is controlled to be a short time state as compared with the normal state. Here, the normal state is a game state other than a special game state such as a big hit game state or a special game state such as a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it does not become the short-time state. You may make it be in a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is This is usually referred to as a big hit symbol (also referred to as a “non-probable big hit symbol”). The variable display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a normal jackpot symbol is variable to “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is referred to as a display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”).

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the state is over, or after the two round jackpot state is over based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, As one of the special game states different from the normal state, for example, the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened compared with the normal state, and the probability variation state (high probability game state) in which probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed. Controlled. In this probability change state, the variable display result of each special figure game and the decorative symbol variable display is improved so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state. Such a probability change state may be continued until the next variable display result is a “hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game. On the other hand, after the certainty change state is reached, any one of the conditions that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the variable display result is “big hit” is first. You may make it complete | finish when it is materialized. In addition, even if the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability change state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, the probability change state ends at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. There may be.

  Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special illustration game is the probable big hit symbol It is called. The variable display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a probable big hit symbol is variable "probable change" (also called "probable big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”). Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. The variable display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol is “surprise” (“surprise big hit” or “sudden probability big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. ")" As a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type").

  In the probabilistic state and the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol variable display time in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol variable display result of each time the normal symbol game is “normal”. Control for improving the probability of “per figure” than in the normal state, when the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” is in the normal state It is advantageous for the player because the start condition is easily established by increasing the possibility that the game ball enters the start winning opening, such as a control to make it longer and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control is performed. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability variation state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed corresponding to variable display of special symbols by the special symbol display device 4. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5, based on the fact that the variable display start condition is satisfied, for example, in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Decorative symbol acceleration display (all symbol acceleration display) is performed, and when a predetermined speed is reached, the decoration symbol constant speed display (all symbol constant speed display) is performed. Such all symbols acceleration display and all symbols constant speed display are included in all symbol variations that variably display the ornament symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. . After all these symbol changes, for example, the symbols are displayed in a decelerating display (each symbol deceleration display) in a predetermined order such as “Left” → “Right” → “Middle” or “Left” → “Middle” → “Right”. If the speed is “0”, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, while a temporary stop display that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion / contraction is performed. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern reaches the variable display time determined based on the variation pattern or the like, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is displayed in a completely stopped state. Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols is not limited to displaying the decorative symbols in a predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, a decorative symbol that is a confirmed decorative symbol at the same time may be displayed in a decelerating display (all symbol decelerating display).

  In this embodiment, after all the symbols are changed, when any of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8” is derived and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L. Then, the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R, and finally the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C. Thus, the display order in which the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the order of “left” → “right” → “middle” is referred to as a normal derivation order (first derivation display order). On the other hand, when the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” is derived and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L after all the symbols have been changed, the “medium” decorative symbol display is subsequently performed. The decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the part 5C, and finally the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display part 5R. The display order in which the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in this order “left” → “middle” → “right” is referred to as a special derivation order (second derivation display order).

  After all symbols change is started, the decorative symbols are reach-displayed on all or some of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. It may be derived and displayed in the state. Here, the reach display state refers to a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative symbol derived and displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variation symbol”). ")" Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R, or “left”). And “medium” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, etc., which constitute a predetermined jackpot combination (for example, a decorative symbol indicating the number “7” or a decorative symbol indicating “Large” and “ The remaining decorative symbol display part that has not been derived and displayed yet (for example, the “middle” decorative symbol display part 5C or the “right” decorative symbol display part). 5L etc.), or the display state in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating, or all or part of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R are all of the big hit combinations. Or synchronize as part of Is a display state in which the change. Corresponding to the reach display state, an effect image such as an animation image or a live-action image different from the decorative design is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, There are times when the variation pattern of the decorative design is changed. Such an effect image display, background image display mode change, and decorative pattern change mode change are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). Some reach productions are set such that when they appear, a big hit is likely to occur (a high probability is a big win) compared to a normal reach production (normal reach). Such a special reach production is also called a super reach production (or simply “super reach”). As an example, for reach production that becomes super reach, after performing a reach production similar to normal reach until a predetermined time elapses, for example, a decorative pattern such as a background image display mode, a displayed character, a decorative pattern variation direction, etc. The change of the production mode (so-called “development”) by changing at least one of the fluctuation modes before the reach display state or at the time of the normal reach, and the reach production peculiar to the super reach The starting part may be included. In addition, in the reach production that becomes super reach, when the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the introduction part in the reach production peculiar to super reach is started without performing the reach production similar to the normal reach. Things may be included.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, it is possible that decorative designs may be derived and displayed in the reach display state, and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. An effect operation for notifying the player by a variable display mode of symbols may be executed. In this embodiment, effects such as “main slip”, “sub slip”, “pseudo train”, “main notice”, and “sub notice” are set to be executable.

  In the “main slip” and “sub-slip” effect operations, all symbol variations that change the ornament symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are performed. Two or more decorative symbol display portions (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R or “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R Etc.), and a predetermined number (for example, “1” to “3”) of the decorative symbol display units (for example, “1” to “3”) among the decorative symbol display units that have been derived and displayed. Only the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R, or the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, or the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C and 5R. Derivation table to stop display after changing the decoration pattern again in all etc.) Doing, effect display is performed to change the decoration pattern to be displayed stopped. Note that it is only necessary to determine whether or not the “main slip” effect operation is to be executed in the game control microcomputer 100 (FIG. 3) mounted on the main board 11 which is the main control board. Then, when the effect operation of “main slip” is executed, the variable symbol display time may be longer than that when the effect operation is not executed. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not the “sub-slip” effect operation is executed in the effect control microcomputer 120 (FIG. 3) mounted on the effect control board 12 which is the sub-side control board. That's fine. Then, depending on whether or not the “sub-slip” effect operation is executed, it is sufficient that the decorative symbol variable display time does not change. In addition, the decorative symbols that are derived and displayed so as to be temporarily stopped in the “main slip” and “sub-sliding” rendering operations, and the decorative symbols that are derived and displayed so as to be stopped again after being re-varied are: It may be determined so that it always becomes a different decorative design, or it may be determined so that it may be the same decorative design.

  In this embodiment, as the effect of “sub-sliding”, after all the symbols are changed, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display sections 5L and 5R are derived so that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. After the display, the decorative symbol is displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R by deriving and displaying it so that the decorative symbol is changed again on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R. The effect display (change effect) for changing the is performed. As the effect of “main slip”, an effect display for changing only the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R, and the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display units 5L and 5R are displayed. An effect display for changing the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed, and an effect display for changing the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, One of a plurality of types of effect display (change effect) is selected and executed. Note that the change effect in the “sub-slide” or “main slide” effect operation is not limited to the one that changes the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed by changing the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed again. The effect image which shows the displayed decorative design may be replaced with the effect image which shows other decorative designs, and the thing etc. which change the decorative design to stop display may be included. When the “sub-slip” effect operation is executed and when the “main slip” effect operation is executed, the effect display that is temporarily stopped is displayed by performing the effect display at the time of the slide in which the effect modes are different from each other. Display the symbol again. In addition, when the “main slip” effect operation is executed, one of a plurality of types of effect display at the time of the slide with different effect modes is selected and executed, so that the temporarily displayed decorative design is displayed again and again. Let At this time, stop display of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is performed at different determination ratios depending on which of the plurality of types of slip effect display is executed. The combination of the decorative symbol display part for changing the decorative symbol to be performed is determined.

  In the “pseudo-ream” production operation, the decorations on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are all decorated based on the fact that the special drawing game start condition is satisfied once. After all the symbols are changed to change the symbols, all the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily on the decorative symbols display 5L, 5C, 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed on all the decorative symbols 5L, 5C, 5R. The effect display for changing the symbol again (pseudo continuous change or pseudo continuous change) can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the “pseudo-ream” effect operation, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R display the pseudo-reambling chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, it is only necessary to set so that the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations increases. Thus, the player can recognize that the pseudo continuous variation is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo continuous chance items GC1 to GC8, and the variable display result as the number of pseudo continuous variations increases. Is expected to become a “big hit”. In this embodiment, in the production operation of “pseudo-continuous”, the quasi-continuous variation is performed once to four times, so that the variable display of the decorative design is performed twice or more based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied once. It can appear as if it had been started 5 times in a row. In the following, based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied once, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations (for example, “1” to “4”) that are executed after the variable symbol display is started and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. ") Is also referred to as pseudo-repetition count.

  In the “main notice” or “sub notice” effect operation, the decorative symbol is in a reach display state by a display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, for example, displaying a predetermined image such as a character image or a message image. The effect display that informs the player that there is a possibility of being derived and displayed and that the variable display result may be a “big hit” is performed. The effect operations of “main notice” and “sub notice” may be executed (started) after all the symbol changes are started and before the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state. Note that it is only necessary to determine whether or not the “main notice” effect operation is to be executed in the game control microcomputer 100 (FIG. 3) mounted on the main board 11 which is the main control board. Then, when the effect operation of “main notice” is executed, the variable symbol display time may be longer as compared with the case where the effect operation is not executed. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not the “sub-notice” effect operation is executed in the effect control microcomputer 120 (FIG. 3) mounted on the effect control board 12 which is the sub-side control board. Just do it. Depending on whether or not the “sub-notice” effect operation is executed, any variable display time of the decorative symbols may be used.

  As an example, in the “main notice” effect operation, an effect display associated with the reach effect in advance (for example, an introduction portion of the reach effect) or an effect display different from the effect display associated in advance is performed. In the “sub-notice” effect operation, an effect display for displaying a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 and a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched in a predetermined order. The effect display to be displayed (the effect display may end without switching the effect image after displaying the effect image displayed first), according to the operation button being operated by the player Any one of a plurality of types of effect display such as effect display for changing the display of the effect image may be performed.

  If the special symbol that will be a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special symbol game that corresponds to the variable display result being “losing”, a decoration of “left”, “middle”, or “right” Among the symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, all of the symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R display patterns 5L, 5C, and 5R. In some cases, the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state in some decorative design display units, and the reach effect is executed. When the reach effect is completed, a definite decorative design that is a reach-losing combination may be derived and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  If the special symbol that becomes the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol for the special symbol game that corresponds to the variable display result being “losing”, the “left”, “ Reach the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display portions (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R, etc.) of the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R. After the derivation display is performed in a non-reach display state different from the display state, a fixed decorative design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be derived and displayed without executing a reach effect. Such a decorative pattern variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “non-reach loss” or “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that is a 15-round jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, as in the variable display mode of “Leach Loss”, all symbols change after starting “Left”, “ The reach effect is executed after the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state in some of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. When the reach effect ends, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As an example, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, the predetermined special symbol is a special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol. A definite decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As another example, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, the confirmed special symbol is a special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probable big hit symbol. A fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be derived and displayed, or a fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be derived and displayed. When the confirmed special symbol is a promising big hit symbol, after the fixed ornament symbol that is normally a big hit combination is derived and displayed, the big hit gaming state is started, the round in the big hit gaming state is being executed, or the big hit gaming state At the time of termination or the like, an effect operation for notifying that the state is controlled to the certain change state may be performed.

  For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display sections 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the determined decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. Among the decorative symbols of “9”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is the ornament of “left”, “middle”, “right” Any of the symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. The decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting such a normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). On the other hand, the confirmed decorative symbols that are the probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols of “1” to “9”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, Any of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. The decorative symbols having symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” that constitute such a probability variation jackpot combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. As described above, among the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “9”, the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8” are “left”, “middle”, “right” in the image display device 5. ”Is included in the normal identification information in which the variable display result is“ big hit ”when the same decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. ing.

  Among the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “1” to “9” that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display sections 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5, Even when the decorative symbols having "9" are stopped and displayed side by side on a predetermined effective line in all of the decorative symbols display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" The variable display result is “big hit”. Here, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is displayed side by side in all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. "," "", "" "" "" "(Large Bonus)", so as to have a unique meaning, it is formed to include characters, etc., constituting different identification information. As described above, among the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “9”, the decorative symbols having the symbol number “9” are the decorative symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5. Special identification that has a unique meaning when the display parts 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed as different pieces of identification information on a predetermined effective line, and the variable display result is “big hit”. Included in the information. Note that the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” may be included in the probability variation symbol. Alternatively, the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” is the decorative symbol display portion 5L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” regardless of whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability”. All of 5C and 5R may be stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern side by side on a predetermined effective line.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, and a predetermined non- There is a case in which the fixed decorative symbol that is the reach combination is stopped and displayed, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In response to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is the two-round jackpot symbol, the two-round jackpot after the various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed. When the two-round big hit state ends, the state is controlled to the probability variation state.

  When the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the changing promotion effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the fluctuating promotion effect, a decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination is temporarily displayed on the effective lines of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. After that, for example, the decorative pattern display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are changed again in a state where the same decorative pattern is aligned, and the decorative symbol that becomes a probable big hit combination, Any of the decorative symbols that are normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, if the promotion effect during fluctuation is executed in response to the fact that the jackpot type is “normal”, the normal bonus game is performed after the decorative pattern displayed temporarily stopped is changed again as the promotion effect during fluctuation. A change promotion promotion effect is performed in which the fixed decorative symbols that are the combination are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the jackpot type being “probable change”, as the changing promotion effect, after the decorative pattern displayed temporarily stopped is changed again A changing promotion success effect that stops and displays a confirmed decorative symbol that becomes a probable big hit combination may be performed, or a changing promotion failure effect may be executed.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the probability change state is the period from when the variable display result is stopped to the end of the round 15 big hit state. A jackpot promotion effect may be executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. It may be a period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, if the definite decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination is stopped, the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed. do it.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette entered the “even number” in the jackpot promotion failure production and displayed the effect image “Sorry!”, While the jackpot promotion promotion production was thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. When the big hit type is “probable change”, but the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed, the promotion will be in the probable change state by executing the promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit game state is finished. What is necessary is just to alert | report that there exists. When the jackpot type is “normal”, it is only necessary not to execute the success promotion effect during the jackpot and not to notify that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state until the jackpot gaming state ends. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a signal relay board 13 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each segment constituting the special symbol display device 4 to control the special symbol variable display by the special symbol display device 4, and to turn on / off the normal symbol display device 20. It also has a function of controlling variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable symbol display by the normal symbol indicator 20 by performing the light-off / coloring control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 101 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 102 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the signal relay board 13, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by electrical components for rendering such as 8R and game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the turn-on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the start port switch 22, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the start port switch 22, and the count switch 23 may have any configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. Further, on the main board 11, wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6 to the solenoid 81, and opening / closing control of the big winning door in the special variable winning ball device 7. The wiring which transmits the command signal for performing to the solenoid 82 is connected. Further, the main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the special symbol display device 4 and the normal symbol display 20.

  A control signal output from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the signal relay board 13. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the signal relay board 13, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 and prevents the signal from being input from the signal relay board 13 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the signal relay board 13 side to the main board 11 side.

  For example, the signal relay board 13 may be provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal output from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent signals from being input from the effect control board 12 to the signal relay board 13 and pass signals only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. . Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the signal relay board 13, and an output buffer is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing the circuit, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 is an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the command 80XXH is a variation pattern designation command transmitted when the special symbol variable display is started in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4. XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it is sufficient that an arbitrary value is set according to the instruction content in the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game is designated, and different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern. The EXT data in the variation pattern designation command is also referred to as variation pattern designation data.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, for example, a prior determination result for determining whether the display result is “lost” or “big hit” when the variable display start condition is satisfied. Also, different EXT data is set corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the big hit type is “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit” . More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” and the big hit type determination result. The EXT data in the variable display result notification command is also referred to as variable display result designation data.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect control command for setting EXT data corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (one of “losing” and “big hit” and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”) is prepared. Then, information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates the start of a big hit gaming state. The hit start designation command differs depending on whether the big hit type in the special game or the like that triggered the big hit gaming state is “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise”. EXT data is set. As an example, in the hit start designation command, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the preliminary determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. The EXT data in the hit start designation command is also referred to as start designation data.

  The command A1XXH is a special prize opening opening designation command that designates display of an effect image during a period in which the big prize opening is open in each round, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH corresponds to the number of executions of the round in the big hit gaming state, and the period (from the end of each round to the closing state of the big winning opening being closed to the opening of the big winning opening in the next round ( This is a designation command after opening the big prize opening that designates display of the effect image in the interval period). In the special winning opening opening designation command and the special winning opening open designation command, different EXT data is set according to, for example, the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the big hit gaming state. In the big hit gaming state, regardless of whether it is a period in which the big prize opening is in an open state in each round or a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state at the end of each round, A continuous performance operation may be executed from the start time to the end time of the big hit gaming state.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end specifying command for specifying the end of the big hit gaming state. The hit end designation command differs depending on whether the big hit type in the special figure game or the like that triggered the big hit gaming state is “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise”. EXT data is set. As an example, in the hit end designation command, the same EXT data as in the hit start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the big hit type when the prior determination result is “big hit”. That's fine. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the big hit type and the EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the hit start designation command.

  The command C0XXH entered the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6 in order to perform a winning display in a special symbol start memory display area provided in the display area of the image display device 5 (start winning). This is a reserved memory count notification command for notifying the special figure reserved memory count that is the number of valid winning balls. In the reserved memory count notification command, different EXT data may be set corresponding to the special figure reserved memory count.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The game control microcomputer 100 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 111, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 112, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 113, a random number circuit 114, and an input circuit. And an output port 115. The ROM 112 stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like in advance, and the RAM 113 provides a game control work area. In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the CPU 111 executes a program read from the ROM 112, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 111 reads out fixed data from the ROM 112, the CPU 111 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 113, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 111 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 113. The CPU 111 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the input / output port 115, and the CPU 111 of the game control microcomputer 100 via the input / output port 115. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside is also performed.

  The random number circuit 114 updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the CPU 111. On the main board 11, for example, a random number circuit 114 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the reach, a variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for determining the type and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 114 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 111 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 114 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 111 by the random number circuit 114, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 111. It may be updated by software using The random number circuit 114 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. For example, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random value MR3 is a random value used for determining whether or not to display a decorative symbol in a reach display state when the variable display result is “lost”. For example, the random number MR3 for reach determination takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used for determining the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type takes a value in the range of “1” to “241”. The random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used for determining the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “251”.

  FIG. 8 shows variations in decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. The pattern is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variation pattern PA1-1 to the variation pattern PA1-5 and the variation pattern PB1- 1 and a variation pattern PB1-2, a variation pattern PC1-1, and a variation pattern PC1-2 are prepared in advance. Further, as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4, variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-5, and variation pattern PB3— 1 to a fluctuation pattern PB3-6, a fluctuation pattern PC3-1, and a fluctuation pattern PC3-2 are prepared in advance. The variable display results are “lost” and variable display modes, such as the variation pattern PA1-1 to variation pattern PA1-5, variation pattern PB1-1 and variation pattern PB1-2, variation pattern PC1-1 and variation pattern PC1-2. The variation pattern prepared corresponding to the case where “is non-reach” is also referred to as a non-reach loss variation pattern (or “normal loss variation pattern”). Like variation pattern PA2-1 to variation pattern PA2-4, variation pattern PA3-1 to variation pattern PA3-5, variation pattern PB3-1 to variation pattern PB3-6, variation pattern PC3-1 and variation pattern PC3-2 The variation pattern prepared for the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach” is also referred to as the reach loss variation pattern. A variation pattern prepared for a case where the variable display result is “lost”, such as a non-reach loss variation pattern or a reach loss variation pattern, is also referred to as a loss variation pattern.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern PA2-5, the variation pattern PA2-6, the variation pattern PA4-1 to the variation pattern. PA4-5, fluctuation pattern PB4-1 to fluctuation pattern PB4-6, fluctuation pattern PB5-1 to fluctuation pattern PB5-6, fluctuation pattern PC4-1 and fluctuation pattern PC4-2, fluctuation pattern PC5-1 and fluctuation pattern PC5- 2, fluctuation pattern PD1-1 and fluctuation pattern PD1-2, fluctuation pattern PD2-1 and fluctuation pattern PD2-2, fluctuation pattern PD3-1 to fluctuation pattern PD3-4 are prepared in advance. Thus, the variation pattern prepared for the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is also referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  Note that the “main designated effect” shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 is a determination result on the main board 11 side that is the control board on the main side among a plurality of types of effect operations executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The effect operation performed based on this is shown. In this embodiment, effects such as “main slip”, “main notice”, and “pseudo train” (in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, “pseudo train once” to “pseudo train four times”) In response to the fact that the variation pattern is determined on the main board 11 side, it is determined whether or not to perform each effect operation.

  Among a plurality of types of variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, variation pattern PC3-1 and variation pattern PC3-2, variation pattern PC4-1 and variation pattern PC4-2, variation pattern PC5-1 and variation pattern PC5- In 2, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the special derivation order. That is, in these variation patterns, among the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, the symbol number “9” is displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L. After the decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C, and then the decorative symbol is displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R. On the other hand, in the fluctuation patterns other than the fluctuation pattern PC3-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC3-2, the fluctuation pattern PC4-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, the fluctuation pattern PC5-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2, in the normal derivation order. A decorative symbol derivation display is performed. Even if any of the fluctuation pattern PC3-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC3-2, the fluctuation pattern PC4-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, the fluctuation pattern PC5-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2, When the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect operation “”, the decorative design may be derived and displayed in the normal derivation order.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 112 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 6 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 112 stores table data respectively constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and setting tables prepared for the CPU 111 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 112 also stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 111 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 200 stored in the ROM 112. The special figure display result determination table 200 is a big hit with the variable display result as “big hit” before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the special symbol by the special symbol display device 4. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether to control to a gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination. In the special figure display result determination table 200, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. Allocation is made so as to be associated with jackpot determination value data and loss determination value data. In the special figure display result determination table 200, the table data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is data for determination allocated to the determination result as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. In the special figure display result determination table 200, when the probability variation flag is on, more random number values MR1 are allocated to the jackpot determination value data than when the probability variation flag is off. As a result, in the probability variation state in which the probability variation flag is turned on, the probability that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is higher than in the normal state or the short time state in which the probability variation flag is turned off. That is, in the special figure display result determination table 200, the determination data is set to the big hit gaming state so that the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state is higher than that in the normal state or the short time state in the probability variation state. Allocated to the result of determining whether to control.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 201 stored in the ROM 112. The jackpot type determination table 201 sets the jackpot type to “normal”, “probability change”, “decision change”, based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” and is controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types such as “accuracy”. In the jackpot type determination table 201, random numbers MR2 for determining the jackpot type are assigned to the jackpot types “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprise”. In the jackpot type determination table 201, the table data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or to control to the 2 round jackpot game state, or to control to the 15 round jackpot state This is data for determination that is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the random value MR2 assigned to the “normal” or “probable” jackpot type indicates the determination result that control is made to the 15-round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the random number value MR2 indicates the determination result that the round-robin state is controlled to 2 rounds. Further, the table data indicating the random number MR2 assigned to the “normal” jackpot type indicates the determination result that the control is not performed in the probability variation state, while being assigned to the jackpot type “probability variation” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the random value MR2 indicates the determination result that the control is performed to the probability variation state. Further, the jackpot type determination table 201 is determined based on the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 20 (the jackpot type buffer value) based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. Table data (setting data) for setting to any one of “0” to “2” corresponding to the big hit type is included.

  12A to 12C show configuration examples of reach determination tables stored in the ROM 112. FIG. In this embodiment, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table 202A illustrated in FIG. 12A, a reach determination table 202B illustrated in FIG. 12B, and a reach determination table 202C illustrated in FIG. Are prepared in advance. Each of the reach determination tables 202A to 202C determines whether or not the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state when it is determined that the variable display result is “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on numerical value MR3. Each reach determination table 202A to 202C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. In each of the reach determination tables 202A to 202C, the reach determination random number MR3 is determined as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2. In a reach display state such as non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2, a determination result indicating that derivation display is not performed, and in a reach display state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Allocation is performed so as to be associated with any one of the determination results for the derivation display.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 202A shown in FIG. 12A, corresponding to the case where the special figure holding storage number is “0”, among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination, “1” to “ A value in the range of “204” is allocated to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, while a value in the range of “205” to “239” is allocated to the determination result of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the special figure pending storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random number values MR3 for reach determination. Is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-2. Further, corresponding to the case where the special figure pending storage number is “2”, the number of random values MR3 for reach determination is larger than the number of random number values allocated to the non-reach HA1-1 and non-reach HA1-2. Values in the range of “1” to “220” are allocated to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the special figure hold storage number is “3” or “4”, the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-3 among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random numbers assigned to each, is assigned to the determination results of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. With such a setting, when the number of special figure hold storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, any one of “1” to “3”), the decorative symbols are derived in a reach display state compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number The rate at which display is determined is reduced. If the average variable display time in the non-reach loss variation pattern is set to be shorter than the average variable display time in the reach loss variation pattern, Compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number, the average variable display time can be shortened.

  In addition, the reach determination table 202B selected as the use table when in the probability variation state or the reach determination table 202C selected as the use table in the time reduction state is selected as the use table when in the normal state. Compared to the reach determination table 202A, a larger number of random values MR3 are allocated to the determination result that the derived display is not performed in the reach display state. With such a setting, the proportion of the determination that the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state is lower in the probability variation state or the short time state than in the normal state. Thus, the average variable display time when the variable display result is “lost” can be shortened in the probability changing state or in the short time state, compared with the normal state.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern type setting table 220 stored in the ROM 112. The variation pattern type setting table 220 is composed of setting data for determining the contents of a plurality of types of variation pattern types in accordance with variable display results and variable display modes (in the case of “big hit”, the big hit type). In this embodiment, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-4, the variation pattern types CA1-4, and the variation pattern types correspond to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. CB1-1 to variation pattern type CB1-3 and variation pattern type CC1-1 to variation pattern type CC1-3 are prepared in advance. Further, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are prepared in advance as variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Furthermore, as the variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probability variation”, the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3, variation pattern type CA3-3. 5 is prepared in advance. A variation pattern type CA3-4 and a variation pattern type CA3-6 are prepared in advance as variation pattern types corresponding only to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable variation”. In addition, variation pattern types CA5-1 to CA5-3 are prepared in advance as the variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable”. Each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns in accordance with the contents defined by the variation pattern type setting table 220. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the variation pattern type CA1-1, the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not shortened in the normal state, and the rendering operation such as “main slip” and “main notice” is not executed. It is a variation pattern type of “no shortening (normal state)”, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening (normal state)”. In the variation pattern type CA1-2, the special symbol or decorative symbol variable display time is shortened corresponding to the case where the number of special figure reservations is "3" in the normal state, and "main slip" or "main notice" Such a variation pattern type of “hold 3 shortened (normal state)” in which the rendering operation is not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “hold 3 shortened (normal state)”. In the variation pattern types CA1-3, the variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the number of special figure reservations is “4” in the normal state, and “main slip” or “main notice” Such a variation pattern type of “reserved 4 shortened (normal state)” that is not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “reserved 4 shortened (normal state)”. The variation pattern types CA1-4 are “main slip, main notice (normal state)” in which the effects of “main slip” and “main notice” are executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach” in the normal state. The variation pattern type includes a variation pattern previously associated with “main slip, main notice (normal state)”.

  In the variation pattern type CB1-1, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened in the probability variation state as compared with the normal state, and the rendering operation such as “main slip” or “main notice” is not performed. The variation pattern type of “probable variation state” ”includes a variation pattern associated with“ no shortening (probability variation state) ”in advance. In the variation pattern type CB1-2, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the number of reserved special figure memories is “2” to “4” in the probability variation state, and “main slip” or The variation pattern type of “hold 2 to 4 shortened (probability variation state)” in which the rendering operation such as “main notice” is not executed, and the variation pattern previously associated with “hold 2 to 4 shortening (probability variation state)” It is comprised including. The variation pattern type CB1-3 is a variation pattern type of “including main slip (probability variation state)” in which the effect operation of “main slip” may be executed during the variable display of decorative symbols in the probability variation state. It includes a variation pattern previously associated with “include (probability variation state)”.

  In the variation pattern type CC1-1, the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened compared to the normal state in the short time state, and the rendering operation such as “main slip” and “main notice” is not executed. The variation pattern type of “short-time state” ”includes a variation pattern associated with“ no shortening (short-time state) ”in advance. In the variable pattern type CC1-2, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the number of special figure reservation memories is “2” to “4” in the short time state, and “main slip” or Fluctuation pattern type of “hold 2 to 4 shortened (short-time state)” in which a production operation such as “main notice” is not executed, and a fluctuation pattern previously associated with “hold 2 to 4 shortened (time-short state)” It is comprised including. The variation pattern type CC1-3 is a variation pattern type of “including main slip (short time state)”, which may execute the effect operation of “main slip” during variable display of decorative symbols in the short time state. It includes a variation pattern that is preliminarily associated with “include (time-short state)”.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is “normal reach (lost)” in which a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived after a normal reach effect (normal reach) is performed after the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state. It is a variation pattern type. The variation pattern type CA2-1 includes a variation pattern that is associated with “normal reach (losing)” in advance. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, after a decorative symbol is derived and displayed in a reach display state, a predetermined decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived and displayed after executing a reach effect α predetermined as a super reach α in the super reach. Variation type of “super reach α (lost)”. The variation pattern type CA2-2 is configured to include a variation pattern associated with “super reach α (losing)” in advance. In the variation pattern type CA2-3, after reaching and displaying the decorative design in the reach display state, the reach effect β1 that is predetermined as the super reach β1 that is different from the super reach α in the super reach is executed, and then the reach loss is performed. This is a variation pattern type of “super reach β1 (losing)” in which a fixed decorative symbol to be combined is derived and displayed. The variation pattern type CA2-3 includes a variation pattern associated with “super reach β1 (losing)” in advance. The variation pattern type CA2-4 executes a reach effect γ1 that is predetermined as a super reach γ1 that is different from the super reach α and the super reach β1 in the super reach after the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state. Then, the variation pattern type of “Super Reach γ1 (Lose)” from which a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, in the reach effect γ1 of the super reach γ1, the effect display by the reproduction display of the moving image is performed. The variation pattern type CA2-4 includes a variation pattern that is associated with “super reach γ1 (losing)” in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA 3-1 is a variation of “normal reach (big hit)” in which, after a decorative symbol is derived and displayed in a reach display state, a normal reach effect (normal reach) is executed and then a definite decorative symbol of a big hit combination is derived and displayed. Pattern type. The variation pattern type CA3-1 includes a variation pattern associated with “normal reach (big hit)” in advance. The variation pattern type CA3-2 is “super reach α (big hit)” in which after the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the reach effect α of the super reach α is executed and then the definite decorative combination of the big hit combination is derived and displayed. Variation pattern type. The variation pattern type CA3-2 includes a variation pattern previously associated with “super reach α (big hit)”. The variation pattern type CA3-3 is “super reach β1 (big hit)” in which the decorative design of the big hit combination is derived and displayed after the reach effect β1 of the super reach β1 is executed after the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state. Variation pattern type. The variation pattern type CA3-3 is configured to include a variation pattern previously associated with “super reach β1 (big hit)”.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-4, after the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the reach effect β2 of the super reach β2 is executed, and then the determined decorative symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed “Super reach β2 (big hit)” Variation pattern type. As an example, in the reach production β2 of the super reach β2, the production operation similar to the reach production β1 of the super reach β1 is executed, and then the production operation different from the reach production β1 of the super reach β1 is continuously executed. Thus, it is only necessary to perform a specific performance operation when the variable display result is “big hit”. As another example, in the reach production β2 of the super reach β2, a production image such as a character image that is not displayed in the reach production β1 of the super reach β1 is displayed together with the production operation similar to the reach production β1 of the super reach β1. When the variable display result is “big hit”, it is only necessary to perform a specific effect operation. The variation pattern type CA3-4 includes a variation pattern that is associated with “super reach β2 (big hit)” in advance.

  For the variation pattern type CA3-5, “decreased decorative symbols of the big hit combination are derived and displayed after the reach effect γ1 of the super reach γ1 is executed after the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state” Variation pattern type. The variation pattern type CA3-5 includes a variation pattern previously associated with “super reach γ1 (big hit)”. In the variation pattern type CA3-6, after the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the reach effect γ2 of the super reach γ2 is executed, and then the determined decorative symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed “super reach γ2 (big hit)” Variation pattern type. As an example, in the reach effect γ2 of the super reach γ2, after the same moving image as that reproduced and displayed in the reach effect γ1 of the super reach γ1 is reproduced and displayed, a moving image different from the reach effect γ1 of the super reach γ1 is displayed. If the variable display result is a “big hit” by continuously reproducing and displaying, etc., it is only necessary to perform a specific effect operation. As another example, in the reach effect γ2 of the super reach γ2, the effect image such as the character image that is not displayed in the reach effect γ1 of the super reach γ1 is displayed together with the moving image reproduced and displayed in the reach effect γ1 of the super reach γ1. For example, it is only necessary to perform a specific performance operation when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  The variation pattern type CA5-1 is a variation pattern type of “normal accuracy” in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise accuracy” in a normal state, and is associated with “normal accuracy accuracy” in advance. It is configured to include a fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern type CA5-2 is a variation pattern type of “probability during probability variation” in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise accuracy” in the probability variation state, and is associated in advance with “probability during probability variation”. It is configured to include a fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern type CA5-3 is a variation pattern type of “short / medium sudden accuracy” in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” in the short time state, and is associated with “short / medium sudden accuracy” in advance. It is configured to include a fluctuation pattern.

  14A to 14C show a configuration example of a non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 112. FIG. In this embodiment, as a non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table, a non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 203A shown in FIG. 14A, a non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 203B shown in FIG. A non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 203C shown in FIG. 14 (C) is prepared in advance. In the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 203A to 203C, when the variable display result is “loss” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variation pattern type is based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. This table is referred to for determination. Each of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 203A to 203C is in accordance with the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Accordingly, it is selected as a use table.

  In the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 203A, the variable pattern type determination table 203A is used for determining the variation pattern type depending on which of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 is the determination result indicating that the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Are assigned so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-4. In the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 203B, the variable pattern type determination table 203B is used for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result that the variable display mode is “non-reach” is non-reach HB1-1 or non-reach HB1-2. Are allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CB1-1 to CB1-3. In the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 203C, for determining the variation pattern type according to whether the determination result that the variable display mode is “non-reach” is non-reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2. Are allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CC1-1 to CC1-3.

  FIGS. 15A to 15C show a configuration example of the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 112. FIG. In this embodiment, the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table 204A shown in FIG. 15A, the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table 204B shown in FIG. 15B, and the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. ) Reach loss variation pattern type determination table 204 </ b> C is prepared in advance. Each of the reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 204A to 204C determines the variation pattern type based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display result is “loss” and the variable display mode is “reach”. This is a table that is referred to. Each reach loss variation pattern type determination table 204A to 204C is in accordance with whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. And selected as a use table.

  In the reach loss variation pattern type determination table 204A, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is determined depending on which of the reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3 is the determination result that the variable display mode is “reach”. Are allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4. In the reach loss variation pattern type determination table 204B, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is represented by the variation pattern type CA2- according to the determination result that the variable display mode is “reach” is reach HB2-1. 1 to 1 so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA2-4. In the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table 204C, in response to the determination result indicating that the variable display mode is “reach” is reach HC2-1, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA2-. 1 to 1 so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA2-4.

  FIGS. 16A to 16F and FIGS. 17A to 17C show configuration examples of the big hit variation pattern type determination table. In this embodiment, as the jackpot variation pattern type determination table, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 205A shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 205B shown in FIG. 16B, and FIG. ) Jackpot variation pattern type determination table 205C shown in FIG. 16D, jackpot variation pattern type determination table 206A shown in FIG. 16D, jackpot variation pattern type determination table 206B shown in FIG. 16E, and FIG. Jackpot variation pattern type determination table 206C shown in FIG. 17, jackpot variation pattern type determination table 207A shown in FIG. 17A, jackpot variation pattern type determination table 207B shown in FIG. 17B, and jackpot variation pattern type determination table 207B shown in FIG. A variation pattern type determination table 207C is prepared in advance. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 205A to 205C, 206A to 206C, and 207A to 207C each determine the variation pattern type for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR4. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 205A to 205C, 206A to 206C, and 207A to 207C follows, for example, the table selection setting as shown in FIG. It is selected as a usage table according to which state it is or depending on the jackpot type buffer value.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 205A, 206A, and 207A, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is associated with one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3 and the variation pattern type CA3-5. So that it is allocated. In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 205B and 207B, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-6. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 206B, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-5.

  With this setting, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, the variable pattern type CA3-4 and the variable pattern type CA3-6 are not determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, the variation pattern type CA3-4 or the variation pattern type CA3-6 may be determined in the normal state or the short time state. Yes, if it is a probable variation state, it may be determined as the variation pattern type CA3-4, but not determined as the variation pattern type CA3-6. Therefore, when the decorative display is variably displayed by the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type CA3-4 or the variation pattern type CA3-6, the variable display result is always “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. As a result, the player's euphoria due to the variable display of the decorative symbols by the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type CA3-4 and the variation pattern type CA3-6 is enhanced, and the supermarket corresponding to the variation pattern type CA3-4 is provided. The effect of the reach effect β2 of the reach β2 and the reach effect γ2 of the super reach γ2 corresponding to the variation pattern type CA3-6 can be enhanced. When a decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” is included in the probability variation symbol, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type in the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 205A, 206A, and 207A is the variation pattern type CA3. It only needs to be allocated so that it is not associated with -5. Thus, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, the variation pattern type CA3-5 is not determined. Therefore, when the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type CA3-5 and the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is always “probable variation”, and the variation pattern type CA3-5 It is possible to enhance the player's joyfulness due to the variable display of the decorative pattern by the included variation pattern, and to enhance the effect of the reach effect γ1 of the super reach γ1 corresponding to the variation pattern type CA3-5. However, the reach effect γ1 of the super reach γ1 corresponding to the variation pattern type CA3-5 is also the variation pattern type CA2-4 when the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. It corresponds. Therefore, when the reach effect γ1 of the super reach γ1 is executed, the variable display result may be “lost”.

  In addition, the decorative pattern is not variably displayed by the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type CA3-6 in the probability variation state, whereas it is included in the variation pattern type CA3-6 in the normal state or the short time state. There is a case where decorative display of a decorative pattern by a variation pattern is performed. When the variable display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type CA3-6 is performed, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable variation” in the normal state or the short time state other than the probability variation state. After the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the probability changing state. This further enhances the player's euphoria due to the variable display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type CA3-6, and the reach effect γ2 of the super reach γ2 corresponding to the variation pattern type CA3-6 It is possible to enhance the effect of production.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 205C, all random number values MR4 for determining the variation pattern type are allocated so as to be associated with the variation pattern type CA5-1. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 206C, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is allotted so as to be associated with the variation pattern type CA5-2. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 207C, random number values MR4 for determining the variation pattern type are all assigned so as to be associated with the variation pattern type CA5-3.

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the loss variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 112. In this embodiment, a loss fluctuation pattern determination table 208A shown in FIG. 18A and a loss fluctuation pattern determination table 208B shown in FIG. 18B are prepared in advance as loss fluctuation pattern determination tables. Each of the loss variation pattern determination tables 208A and 208B determines whether to reach the reach display state or the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern based on the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the loss variation pattern determination tables 208A and 208B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, it is determined that one of the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-4, variation pattern type CB1-1 to variation pattern type CB1-3, variation pattern type CC1-1 to variation pattern type CC1-3. According to the result, the loss variation pattern determination table 208A is selected as the usage table, and the loss variation pattern determination table 208B is used according to the determination result indicating that any one of the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 is used. Selected as.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 208A, according to the variation pattern type, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern includes one or more types of variations in which the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Allocated to the pattern. In the loss variation pattern determination table 208B, according to the variation pattern type, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is allocated to a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It is.

  FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of the big hit variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 112. In this embodiment, as a big hit variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table 209A shown in FIG. 19A and a big hit variation pattern determination table 209B shown in FIG. 19B are prepared in advance. Each of the big hit variation pattern determination tables 209A and 209B has a variable pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type, the determination result of the variable pattern type, etc., when it is determined that the variable display result is controlled as the big hit gaming state. Is a table that is referred to for determining a variation pattern based on a random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern. Each big hit variation pattern determination table 209A, 209B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the jackpot variation pattern determination table 209A is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that one of the variation pattern types CA3-1 to variation pattern types CA3-6, and the variation pattern type CA5-1 to variation pattern type CA5. The jackpot variation pattern determination table 209B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of −3 is selected. In each of the big hit variation pattern determination tables 209A and 209B, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is allocated to a plurality of types of variation patterns whose variable display result is “big hit” according to the variation pattern type.

  In these loss variation pattern determination tables 208A and 208B and jackpot variation pattern determination tables 209A and 209B, the variation pattern to which the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is assigned according to the variation pattern type is included in the variation pattern type. Fluctuation pattern. As an example, a variation pattern PA1-1 in which all random number values MR5 are allocated according to the variation pattern type CA1-1 in the loss variation pattern determination table 208A shown in FIG. 18A is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1. The variation pattern is included. The loss variation pattern determination tables 208A and 208B and the big hit variation pattern determination tables 209A and 209B are based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, and are selected from one or more types of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type. This is a table for selecting a variation pattern in variable display.

  Random value MR4 is allocated to each variation pattern type in reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 204A to 204C, and random number MR4 is allocated to each variation pattern type in jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 205A to 205C, 206A to 206C, and 207A to 207C. After the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state by allocating the random value MR5 to each variation pattern in the loss variation pattern determination table 208B and allocating the random value MR5 to each variation pattern in the jackpot variation pattern determination tables 209A and 209B. The possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” varies depending on the effect mode of the reach effect to be executed. As described above, the possibility (probability) that the variable display result determined for each rendering mode in the reach effect becomes “big hit” is also called reach big hit reliability, or simply reach reliability. Here, the reach reliability corresponding to each reach production is ((percentage of execution of the reach at the time of big hit) × (probability of jackpot)) / ((percentage of execution of the reach at the time of loss) × (loss probability) ) + (Execution ratio of the reach effect at the time of jackpot) × (probability of jackpot)). Note that (loss probability) = 1− (big hit probability).

  As an example, during the variable display of the decorative pattern by any one of the variation pattern PC3-1 and the variation pattern PC3-2, the variation pattern PC4-1, and the variation pattern PC4-2, an effect operation that becomes the reach effect γ1 is executed. . In the reach effect γ1, a moving image is reproduced and displayed. The reach reliability corresponding to the reach effect γ1 is, for example, the reach reliability corresponding to the reach effect in which the moving image is not reproduced and displayed, such as the “normal” reach effect, the reach effect α, and the reach effect β1. The allocation of the random value MR4 for each variation pattern type in the reach-losing variation pattern type determination tables 204A to 204C may be set in advance so as to be higher. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative pattern by either the variation pattern PC5-1 or the variation pattern PC5-2, an effect operation that becomes the reach effect γ2 is executed. In this reach effect γ2, for example, an effect operation by reproducing and displaying a moving image similar to the reach effect γ1 is performed, or an effect operation by reproducing and displaying a moving image similar to the reach effect γ1 is performed. After that, it is only necessary to reproduce and display a moving image different from the reach effect γ1. Alternatively, in the reach effect γ2, for example, an effect operation by reproducing and displaying a moving image similar to the reach effect γ1 is performed, and an effect image (for example, a cut-in image) indicating a character or a scene that does not appear in the reach effect γ1. An effect operation peculiar to the reach effect γ2, such as an effect operation by displaying, may be performed. The fluctuation pattern PC5-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2 are jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined as usage patterns only when the variable display result is “big hit”. Further, the reach loss variation pattern does not include a pattern in which an effect operation that becomes the reach effect γ2 is executed. Accordingly, the reach reliability corresponding to the reach effect γ2 is, for example, the reach reliability corresponding to the reach effect in which the moving image is not reproduced and displayed, such as the “normal” reach effect, the reach effect α, and the reach effect β1. It becomes higher than that, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” with a probability of 100%.

  In addition, the variable display results of the rendering operations that are “main designated rendering” such as “main sliding”, “main notice”, and “pseudo-continuous” rendering operations depend on which rendering operation is executed. Are likely to be “big hits”. In this way, the possibility (probability) that the variable display result determined for each of the plurality of types of performance operations becomes “big hit” is also called the big hit reliability of the production operation or simply the reliability of the production operation. Here, the reliability of the rendering operation corresponding to each rendering operation is ((execution rate of the rendering operation at the time of big hit) × (probability of jackpot)) / ((execution rate of the rendering operation at the time of loss) × (lost) Probability) + (Execution rate of the effect operation at the time of jackpot) × (probability of jackpot)).

  In this embodiment, any one of the fluctuation pattern PC3-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC3-2, the fluctuation pattern PC4-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, the fluctuation pattern PC5-1, and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2 shown in FIGS. If it is determined, the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” included in the special identification information is selected from the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a reach display state by being derived and displayed side by side on a predetermined effective line in the two decorative symbols display units. When the “main designated effect” is an effect operation of “main slide”, the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” included in the special identification information is changed to “left”, “middle”, “right”. Of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, one decorative symbol display portion may be derived and displayed. When the special identification information is derived and displayed on the two decorative symbol display units, the probability (probability) that it is a big hit is higher than when the special identification information is derived and displayed on the single decorative symbol display unit. For example, the allocation of the random number MR4 to each variation pattern type in the reach-losing variation pattern type determination tables 204A to 204C may be set in advance so as to increase. In other words, the allocation of random values in various tables is set in advance so that the probability that the variable display result will be a “big hit” increases as the number of decorative symbol display portions from which special identification information is derived and displayed increases. Just do it.

  In the RAM 113 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 6, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the game control as shown in FIG. A data holding area 150 is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 20 includes a special figure storage unit 151, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit. 155.

  The special figure holding storage unit 151 stores the holding data of a special figure game in which a starting ball is won by a game ball winning in a start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 but the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. As an example, the special figure holding storage unit 151 is used for determining a special figure display result that is associated with the holding number in the order of winning from the start winning opening and extracted from the random number circuit 114 or the like by the CPU 111 based on the establishment of the starting condition by the winning. The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type are reserved data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a big hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag is used to control the progress of the special figure game by the special symbol display device 4 and the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 in the big hit gaming state. In the special symbol process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. The jackpot flag is set to the on state when it is determined that the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as “big hit”, while the special symbol game based on the determination is finished, etc. Cleared to OFF state. The probability variation flag is set to the on state when the control for changing the gaming state to the probability variation state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and is cleared to the off state when the control for the probability variation state is ended. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state when the control for setting the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and is cleared to the off state when the control for the time reduction state is ended. .

  Game control timer setting unit 153 Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in various timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a special symbol process timer or the like.

  The special symbol process timer mainly includes a time for controlling the progress of the special symbol game such as a special symbol variable display time which is the execution time of the special symbol game, and a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state. This is for measuring on the substrate 11 side. For example, the special symbol process timer stores the timer value data corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the special symbol game or the big hit gaming state as a special symbol process timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. In this case, when the special symbol display device 4 starts the special symbol game, the special symbol process timer is set with a timer initial value determined according to the variation pattern, and the special variable winning ball device in the big hit gaming state. When the big prize opening formed by 7 is opened, a timer initial value corresponding to the longest duration of one round (for example, 29 seconds) is set. Alternatively, the special symbol process timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and the elapsed time from the start time of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts up. May be used as

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a special figure holding memory number counter, a round number counter, a probability variation number counter, a short time number counter, and the like.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 allows a CPU 111 to update a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game by software unlike the hardware update in the random number circuit 114. It is for counting. As an example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 are stored as random count values, which are periodically or irregularly set according to the execution of software by the CPU 111. The numerical data indicating the random value is updated.

  The special figure reserved memory number counter is for counting the special figure reserved memory number as the number of reserved data in the special figure reserved memory unit 151. For example, in the special figure reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number is stored as a special figure reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating the initial count value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  The probability variation counter is for counting the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed. For example, the probability variation counter displays a probability variation state when the jackpot gaming state ends when the variable symbol display result of special symbol or decoration symbol is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable variation” or “surprise”. Thus, data indicating the upper limit number (for example, “100”) of the special figure game predetermined as executable is set as the count initial value. Then, when a special game in which the variable display result is “losing” is executed in the probability variation state, the count value in the probability variation counter is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted). Note that the probability variation count counter may not be provided if the probability variation state continues until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game after entering the probability variation state. .

  The time reduction counter is for counting the number of remaining special game that can be executed in the time reduction state. For example, the hourly number counter can be executed in the time-shortened state when the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable symbol display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”. Data indicating a predetermined upper limit number of special figure games (for example, “100”) is set as the initial count value. Then, when a special game in which the variable display result is “losing” is executed in the time reduction state, the count value in the time reduction counter is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted). In addition, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” and the normal hit state is entered after the big hit gaming state ends, a short time counter is provided. It does not have to be.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. As an example, the transmission command buffer may include an effect control command buffer that temporarily stores setting data for transmitting an effect control command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The transmission command buffer includes a plurality of (for example, “12”) buffer areas, and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 112 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  In the big hit type buffer, a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is one of a plurality of types such as “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprising accuracy” is stored. . As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 201 as shown in FIG. 11, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the value of the jackpot type buffer (the jackpot type buffer value) is set to “0”, and the jackpot type When the type is “probable change”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “1”, and when the big hit type is “surprise”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “2”.

  The input / output port 115 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 6 includes an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various inputs to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmitting a signal.

  For example, an effect control microcomputer 120, a display control unit 121, a sound control unit 122, and a lamp control unit 123 are mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. The effect control board 12 is connected to wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting a driving signal to the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9.

  FIG. 21 shows a configuration example of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the display control unit 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. The production control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 13 is configured using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and the CPU 131 performs control operations according to a program. The ROM 132 stores the production control program, fixed data, and the like. A RAM 133 that provides a work area, an oscillation circuit 134 that provides a reference clock signal to the CPU 131, a reset circuit 135 that outputs a reset signal for resetting the CPU 131, and an input / output port 136 are provided. As an example, in the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU 131 executes a program read from the ROM 132, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 131 reads fixed data from the ROM 132, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 131 writes various variation data in the RAM 133 and temporarily stored therein, and a variety of variation data in which the CPU 131 is temporarily stored in the RAM 133. The CPU 131 receives various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the input / output port 136, and the CPU 131 performs various operations to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the input / output port 136. A transmission operation for outputting a signal is also performed. The input / output port 136 transmits to the input port to which the presentation control command transmitted from the main board 11 is input, the input port to which the display information transmitted from the display control unit 121 is input, and the display control unit 121. If an output port that outputs a display control command, an output port that outputs audio data transmitted to the sound control unit 122, an output port that outputs lamp data transmitted to the lamp control unit 123, and the like are included. Good.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. 35 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. . FIG. 22 illustrates the random number value counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, pseudo-run once execution determination Random number SR2, random numbers SR3-1 to SR3-4 for determining the first to fourth pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, random value SR4 for determining sub-slip execution, random value SR5 for determining main slip pattern, first Numeral data indicating each of random number values SR6-1 to SR6-8 for determining the eighth stop temporary stop symbol is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The CPU 131 uses a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 to update various numerical data by software, thereby random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3-1 to SR3-4. , SR4, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-8 may be counted as numerical data indicating all or part of them. In addition, a random number circuit for updating numerical data that becomes a random number value is provided independently of the CPU 131, and the random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3-1 to SR3-4, SR4, SR5, SR6-1. Numerical data indicating all or part of ~ SR6-8 may be updated by the random number circuit. The random number circuit may be built in the effect control microcomputer 120 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the effect control microcomputer 120.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the image display device 5 as fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. , A random number value used for determining a decoration symbol (final stop symbol) derived and displayed on each of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. The final stop symbols here are finally stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. It is a decorative pattern. As an example, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “67”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The third random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “97”.

  The random number value SR2 for determining whether to execute the pseudo-continuous once, when a predetermined variation pattern is designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the pseudo-continuous variation is 1 as the effect operation of the “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to execute the number of times. In this embodiment, among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, when a variation pattern whose “main designation effect” is “none / pseudo continuous once” is designated by the variation pattern designation command, It is determined whether or not the continuous variation is executed once. As an example, the random number SR2 for determining whether to execute the pseudo-ream once takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”.

  The random numbers SR3-1 to SR3-4 for determining the first to fourth pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when performing the “pseudo-continuous” rendering operation. This is a random value used to determine the combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed on all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. Here, in the “pseudo-continuous” effect operation, the pseudo-continuous variation in which the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on all the decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, and 5R after the decorative symbol variation display is started is displayed. Performed a predetermined number of times. The random numbers SR3-1 to SR3-4 for determining the first to fourth pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbols are the remaining number of pseudo-continuous changes that are executed before the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Is used to determine a temporary stop symbol to be any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. Here, the remaining number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is “0”, for example, when the decorative symbol that is the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed (during the re-variation display), and the pseudo-continuous symbol that is the last stop symbol is “0”. The temporary stop symbol corresponding to the change is “1” during the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the temporary stop symbol corresponding to the change is displayed. 2 ”, how many times the pseudo-variation variation is executed before the variation display (re-variation display) of the decorative symbol in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped is displayed. It corresponds to. The random value SR3-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is used to determine the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped after the decorative symbol variation display in which the number of remaining pseudo continuous variations is “1” is performed. The random number SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol is used to display a temporary stop display after the decorative symbol with the remaining number of pseudo-continuations of “2” is displayed. One of the random numbers SR3-1 to SR3-4 for determining the first to fourth pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbols corresponding to the remaining number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, such as used to determine a symbol. By using this, a decorative symbol to be a temporary stop symbol is determined. As an example, the first pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo-simultaneous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-3 takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”. The random number SR3-4 for determining the temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “327”.

  The sub-slip execution determination random number SR4 is a random value used to determine whether or not to perform the “sub-slip” effect operation. As an example, the sub-slip execution determination random value SR4 takes a value in the range of “1” to “199”. The random value SR5 for determining the main slip pattern is determined when the main slip is performed when the effect of “main slip” is executed based on the fact that the predetermined change pattern is specified by the change pattern specifying command transmitted from the main board 11. It is a random value used to determine one of a plurality of patterns. In this embodiment, the main slip pattern is determined when a variation pattern having “main designated effect” as “main slip” is designated by the variation pattern designation command among the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8 and 9. Is done. As an example, the random value SR5 for determining the main slip pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”.

  The random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-8 for determining the temporary stop symbols during the first to eighth slips are “left”, “middle”, It is a random number value used to determine a temporary stop symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed on a part or all of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, the random value SR6-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the first slip takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”, and the random value SR6-2 for determining the second temporary stop symbol for the slip is “ Random value SR6-3 for determining the third slip temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “137”, and a fourth slip temporary stop symbol in the range of “1” to “107”. The random number value SR6-4 for determination takes a value in the range of “1” to “139”, and the random value SR6-5 for determination of the fifth slip temporary stop symbol is a value in the range of “1” to “197”. The random value SR6-6 for determining the sixth temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding takes a value in the range of “1” to “397”, and the random value SR6-7 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the seventh slip is “ The random number SR6-8 for determining the eighth stop temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “389”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 132 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 21 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 132 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the CPU 131 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  23A to 23C show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 250A to 250C stored in the ROM 132. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 250 </ b> A to 250 </ b> C are tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is one of the predetermined non-reach combinations. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 250A includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L among the finalized symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. Is a table referred to in order to determine the value based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It should be noted that the final stop symbol determination table 250A is the final stop that is the same fixed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display portions 5L and 5R among the determined ornament symbols that are reach-losing combinations. Reference may be made to determine the symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 250A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. . On the other hand, in the final stop symbol determination table 250A, the random number SR1-1 is not assigned to the symbol number “9” of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. As a result, the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” and serving as the special identification information is not included as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 in any of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the predetermined non-reach combination.

  The final stop symbol determination table 250B Among the fixed decorative patterns that will be a predetermined non-reach combination, The right final stop symbol FZ1-2, which is a confirmed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “right” ornament symbol display portion 5R, This table is referred to for determination based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2. In the final stop symbol determination table 250B, According to the symbol numbers “1” to “9” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, The random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is To the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, Allocated. In addition, According to the setting of the final stop symbol determination table 250A shown in FIG. Although it is not determined as a decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, There is a possibility that the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 due to an error or the like. there, In the final stop symbol determination table 250B, Corresponding to the case where the symbol number of the decorative symbol which is the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is “9”, A random value SR1-2 is allocated. According to these settings, Even when the symbol number “9” is determined as the decorative symbol as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 due to an error or the like, It is possible to prevent the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 from being determined. Also, In the final stop symbol determination table 250B, For the symbol number “9” of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, The random value SR1-2 is not allocated. This The design number is “9” and the special design information is On any of the confirmed decorative symbols that make up a given non-reach combination, It is not included as the right final stop symbol FZ1-2.

  The final stop symbol determination table 250C includes medium final stop symbols FZ1-3, which are finalized symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C, among the finalized symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determination based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like. Here, the ROM 132 stores a left / right outcome determination table 251 as shown in FIG. 24. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, a left / right outcome type DC1 is stored. It is determined whether −1 corresponds to LR0 to LR26. In the final stop symbol determination table 250C, the random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is determined to be the middle final stop depending on the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0 to LR26. The symbols are assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be symbols FZ1-3. On the other hand, in the final stop symbol determination table 250C, the random number SR1-3 is not assigned to the symbol number “9” of the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3. As a result, the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” and serving as the special identification information is not included in the final decorative symbol FZ1-3 in any of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the predetermined non-reach combination.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 250B, the second final stop is provided in a portion where the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. The random number value SR1-2 for design determination is not allocated. With such a setting, when a finalized symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the combination of the finalized symbol is a reach-losing combination or a jackpot combination (except for the chance of winning TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. In the final stop symbol determination table 250C, the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is a combination of predetermined decorative symbols. The random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned. For example, even in a combination other than the reach-losing combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 4A, the part that becomes the chance of chance TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 25, the random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not allocated to a portion that is a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG. The combination of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 25 includes the same decorative symbols as the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, for example, and the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, It includes a combination of decorative symbols that are likely to be mistaken as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 or the odd chances TC1 to TC4 such that the arrangement order of the decorative symbols in 5R is different. With such a setting, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, a random chance item TC1 to TC4, It is possible to prevent a certain non-reach combination similar to the chance eyes.

  26A to 26C show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 252A to 252C stored in the ROM 132. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 252A to 252C are tables for determining a definite decorative symbol that is one of the big hit combinations and the odd chances TC1 to TC4. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 252A is stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as fixed ornament symbols that are normally a big hit combination. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 252A, the random numbers SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol are the same as the symbol numbers of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, respectively. “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are allocated. In the final stop symbol determination table 252B, the left and middle symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as the final symbol symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 252B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the symbol number of the probable variation symbol that becomes the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” are allocated. The final stop symbol determination table 252C includes the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined decorative symbols to be one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 252C, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is allocated to the chances of success TC1 to TC4.

  FIG. 27 shows a configuration example of the pseudo-continuous once execution determination table 253 stored in the ROM 132. The quasi-continuous one-time execution determination table 253 is used to determine whether or not the quasi-continuous variation is executed once as a “pseudo-continuous” effect operation when a predetermined variation pattern is designated by the variation pattern designation command. It is a table that is referred to. In the quasi-continuous execution determination table 253, the random value SR2 for determining the quasi-continuation one-time execution is “with quasi-continuous” or “ It is assigned so as to be associated with the determination result of “no pseudo-ream”. In the pseudo-run once execution determination table 253, the random value SR2 corresponding to the determination results of “with pseudo-run” or “without pseudo-run” depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”. The allocation of is different. With such a setting, when a predetermined variation pattern is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the “pseudo-continuous” is determined with different determination probabilities depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “losing”. It is determined whether or not the pseudo continuous variation is executed once as the effect operation.

  FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 254 stored in the ROM 132. The pseudo-continuous chance determination table 254 is a table that is referred to in order to determine a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped when the “pseudo-continuous” effect operation is executed. The pseudo continuous chance determination table 254 includes tables of temporary stop TG1-1, temporary stop TG1-2, temporary stop TG2 to temporary stop TG4. Here, the table of the temporary stop TG1-1 is used to determine a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the pseudo continuous variation is executed when the pseudo continuous number is “1”. On the other hand, the table of temporary stop TG1-2 shows the temporary display after the decorative symbol change display in which the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1” when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2” or more. This is used to determine the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed.

  The table of the temporary stop TG1-1 includes the first pseudo-series in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “9” of the decorative symbols that are the left final stopped symbols as the final stopped symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L. Determination data assigned to the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3, etc. It is composed of For example, in the temporary stop TG1-1 table, when the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbols are “1” to “8” (other than “9”), the left final stop symbol and the left temporary stop symbol A random value SR3-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned so that KZ2-1 has the same decorative symbol.

  The table of the temporary stop TG1-2 is displayed in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L. Determination data assigned to the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3, etc. It is composed of Here, among the plurality of types of variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the variation pattern PC3-1 and the variation pattern PC3-2, the variation pattern PC4-1 and the variation pattern PC4-2, the variation pattern PC5-1, and the variation. If it is any of the patterns PC5-2, the symbol number of the decorative symbol which is the left final stop symbol is “9”. In the settings shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, in any of the fluctuation pattern PC3-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC3-2, the fluctuation pattern PC4-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, the fluctuation pattern PC5-1, and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2. However, the “main designated effect” is “none / pseudo-run once”, and the number of pseudo-runs does not exceed “twice”. Therefore, in the temporary stop TG1-2 table shown in FIG. 28, the pseudo-continuous chance GC1-GC8 is determined according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbols. It is not necessary to consider the case where the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the left final stop symbol is “9”. In the temporary stop TG1-2 table, when the same decorative symbol as the left final stop symbol is the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a decorative symbol different from the left final stop symbol is the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1. Compared to the case, a larger number of random values SR3-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol are assigned.

  In such a setting, there is a possibility that the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 and the left final stop symbol among the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed when executing the last pseudo-continuous variation are the same decorative symbol. Rise. As a result, the final pseudo-continuous variation is executed, so that the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L are not changed, while the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5C. The decorative design that is stopped and displayed on 5R is changed, and the impression that the variable display state approaches the reach state is given to the player by the continuous display of the decorative design, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  Further, in the table of temporary stop TG1-2, when the left final stop symbol is a normal symbol such as “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 is “1”. ”,“ 3 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 7 ”for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols so that the pseudo-chance chances GC1, GC3, GC5, GC7 which are probable variation symbols are not determined. A random value SR3-1 is assigned. As a result, from the state where the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 becomes a probability variable symbol and becomes a probability variable big hit combination, the left final stop symbol becomes a normal symbol and there is no possibility of becoming a probability variable big hit combination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation that the jackpot type is “probable change” from being reduced.

  The temporary stop TG2 table is a combination of the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, right stop symbol KZ2-2, and intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 determined using the temporary stop TG1-2 table. The random number SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, and KZ3-3, depending on which of the two is GC8. It is composed of data for determination assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop TG3 table is a combination of the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop TG2 table. The random number SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 depending on which of the GC8 is. Data for determination to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. In the temporary stop TG4 table, the combination of the left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 determined using the temporary stop TG3 table is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1. The random number SR3-4 for determining the fourth pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ5-1, KZ5-2, and KZ5-3 depending on which of the GC8 is. Data for determination to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  FIG. 29A shows a setting example for selecting a table included in the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 254. As shown in FIG. 29 (A), each table included in the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 254 is a variable M set / updated in the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determining process shown in FIG. Use to determine which of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is a combination of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed in correspondence with the value of the pseudo-continuous sequence itself, etc. Selected as a table. For example, the table of the temporary stop TG1-1 is selected as a use table when the value of the variable M is “1” and the number of pseudo consecutive times is “1”. The temporary stop TG1-2 table shows that when the value of the variable M is “2” and the number of pseudo-continuous times is “2”, the value of the variable M is “3” and the number of pseudo-continuous times is “3”. , When the value of the variable M is “4” and the quasi-continuous number is “4”, it is selected as the use table. The temporary stop TG2 table shows that when the value of the variable M is “1” and the number of pseudo-continuous times is “2”, the value of the variable M is “2” and the number of pseudo-continuous times is “3”. When the value of M is “3” and the number of pseudo consecutive times is “4 times”, it is selected as a use table. The temporary stop TG3 table shows that when the value of the variable M is “1” and the number of pseudo-continuous times is “3”, the value of the variable M is “2” and the number of pseudo-continuous times is “4”. Selected as a usage table. The table of the temporary stop TG4 is selected as a use table when the value of the variable M is “1” and the number of pseudo consecutive times is “4 times”.

  With such a setting, for example, as shown in FIG. 29B, the decorative symbol display section of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is displayed by the variation of the decorative symbol at each time in accordance with the number of times of the pseudo continuous variation. The decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all of 5L, 5C, and 5R can be determined as any one of pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  FIG. 30 shows a configuration example of the sub-slip execution determination table 255 stored in the ROM 132. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not execute the effect operation of “main slip”, the sub slip execution determination table 255 is on the side of the effect control board 12 that is the sub control board. The table referred to in order to determine whether or not to perform the “sub-slip” effect operation. In the sub-slip execution determination table 255, the random number SR4 for sub-slip execution determination indicates “no sub-slip” or “sub-slip” depending on which of a plurality of types of change patterns specified by the change pattern specification command. It is assigned to one of the determination results of “Yes”.

  FIG. 31 shows a configuration example of the main slip pattern determination table 256 stored in the ROM 132. The main slip pattern determination table 256 is used to determine a main slip pattern as one of a plurality of types when the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command is a change pattern for executing the effect operation of “main slip”. It is a table to be referenced. In this embodiment, main slip patterns MS1-1 to MS1-3 and main slip pattern MS2-1 are prepared in advance as a plurality of types of main slip patterns. In the main slip pattern determination table 256, the random value SR5 for determining the main slip pattern is one of a plurality of types of main slip patterns according to which of the plurality of types of change patterns specified by the change pattern specifying command. Allocated to

  In the main slip pattern MS1-1, an effect display is performed in which only the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed are changed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. In the main slip pattern MS1-2, an effect display for changing the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R is performed. In the main sliding pattern MS1-3 and the main sliding pattern MS2-1, an effect display for changing the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is done. In addition, when the main sliding pattern MS1-1 to main sliding pattern MS1-3 is one of the main sliding patterns MS2-1 or the main sliding pattern MS2-1, the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols is executed once again. The effect mode in the effect display at the time of the slip is different.

  32 and 33 show a configuration example of the pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination table 257 stored in the ROM 132. The pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination table 257 is used to determine a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed before the effect operations of “main slip” and “sub-slip” are executed. It is a table that is referred to. In the pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination table 257, the temporary stop TS1, temporary stop TS2, temporary stop TM1-1, temporary stop 1-2 table shown in FIG. 32, temporary stop TM1-3, temporary stop shown in FIG. A table of stop TM1-4, temporary stop TM2-1 and temporary stop TM2-2 is included.

  The temporary stop TS1 table shown in FIG. 32 shows a “right” decorative symbol display when the “sub-slip” effect operation is executed when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a non-reach loss variation pattern. It is a table for deciding the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the part 5R. The temporary stop TS2 table includes a “right” decorative symbol display section when the “sub-slip” effect operation is executed when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a reach loss variation pattern or a big hit variation pattern. It is a table for deciding the decoration design which is temporarily stopped and displayed in 5R. When the “sub-sliding” effect operation is executed, the decorative symbols determined with reference to the temporary stop TS1 and temporary stop TS2 tables are temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. After that, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R are displayed again and changed, thereby changing the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R.

  The table of temporary stop TM1-1 shown in FIG. 32 shows that the main slip pattern MS1-1 is executed when the effect of “main slip” is executed when the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command is a non-reach loss change pattern. This is a table for determining the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. The temporary stop TM1-2 table indicates that when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a reach loss variation pattern or a big hit variation pattern, the effect of performing “main slip” is executed. Corresponding to the determination, this is a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R.

  The table of the temporary stop TM1-3 shown in FIG. 33 corresponds to the determination that the main slip pattern MS1-2 or the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined to execute the “main slip” effect operation. This is a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 5L. The table of the temporary stop TM1-4 displays the “right” decorative symbol display corresponding to the main slip pattern MS1-2 or the main slip pattern MS1-3 being determined to execute the “main slip” effect operation. It is a table for deciding the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the part 5R. The temporary stop TM2-1 table is temporarily displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L in response to the main slip pattern MS2-1 being determined to execute the “main slip” effect operation. It is a table for deciding the decorative design displayed in a stopped manner. The temporary stop TM2-2 table temporarily stops at the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R in response to the main slip pattern MS2-1 being determined to execute the “main slip” effect operation. It is a table for determining the decorative design displayed.

  FIG. 34A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern table 260 stored in the ROM 132. The effect control pattern table 260 includes a symbol variation control pattern table 261, a changing effect control pattern table 262, and a big hit effect control pattern table 263. The symbol variation control pattern table 261 includes table data indicating a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns. The changing effect control pattern table 262 includes table data indicating a plurality of types of changing effect control patterns. The big hit effect control pattern table 263 includes table data indicating a plurality of types of big hit effect control patterns.

  FIG. 34B shows a configuration example of a symbol variation control pattern stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 261. In the design variation control pattern, the decorative design variable display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 and the reach in the period from the start of the design design variation to the final display design stop display. Control contents of various effects operations such as effect display operations in effects are determined in advance corresponding to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, for example. Data indicating each symbol variation control pattern includes control patterns for controlling various effect operations according to variable display of decorative symbols, such as effect control process timer setting values, display control patterns, sound control patterns, and lamp control patterns. It is only necessary to include data and set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series. Here, the effect control process timer set value is set, for example, in an effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. 35 when starting variable display of decorative symbols by each symbol variation control pattern. Timer initial value. The display control pattern is a control pattern of an operation for displaying various effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 and includes control data such as a display control timer determination value and display control data. The sound control pattern is a control pattern for outputting the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and includes control data such as a sound control timer determination value and sound control data. The lamp control pattern is a control pattern for turning on, turning off, and blinking the game effect lamp 9, and includes control data such as a lamp control timer determination value and lamp control data, for example.

  In the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU 131 is based on, for example, a change pattern specified by a change pattern specifying command, a determination result on whether or not to execute a “pseudo-continuous once” or “sub-slip” effect operation, and the like. Then, one of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns is selected, read out from the symbol variation control pattern table 261, and set as a use pattern. Then, by transmitting a display control command corresponding to the display control data included in the display control pattern to the display control unit 121, the control content of the effect display operation such as the decorative display variable display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. Instruct. Also, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R is controlled by transmitting sound data corresponding to the sound control data included in the sound control pattern to the sound control unit 122 via the input / output port 136. Further, by controlling the lamp data corresponding to the lamp control data included in the lamp control pattern to the lamp control unit 123 via the input / output port 136, the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED is controlled. To do.

  In a plurality of types of changing effect control patterns stored in the changing effect control pattern table 262, for example, the control contents of various types of notification effects, which are effect operations of “main notice” or “sub notice”, for example, a plurality of kinds of notice effects. It is determined in advance corresponding to each of the notice patterns. The data indicating each variation effect control pattern includes, for example, control pattern data for controlling various effect operations as a notice effect such as an effect control process timer setting value, a display control pattern, an audio control pattern, and a lamp control pattern. It is only necessary to set various contents of the effect control, the timing of switching the effect control, and the like in time series.

  In a plurality of types of jackpot effect control patterns stored in the jackpot effect control pattern table 263, the period during which the jackpot game state is controlled, the control contents of various effect operations when the jackpot game state is ended, for example, It is determined in advance corresponding to the number of rounds executed. The data indicating each jackpot effect control pattern controls various effect operations according to the progress of the effect operation in the jackpot gaming state, such as the effect control process timer setting value, the display control pattern, the sound control pattern, and the lamp control pattern. Control pattern data and the like, and timing control switching timing and the like may be set in time series. Note that different types of jackpot effect control patterns may be prepared according to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, in the case of executing a continuous performance operation regardless of the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state, at least one type of big hit effect corresponding to the entire period controlled in the big hit game state A control pattern may be prepared.

  In the RAM 133 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 21, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 35 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 35 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of the multiple types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120. For example, the display control unit 121 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining timing for switching effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Control for. For example, as shown in FIG. 21, the display control unit 121 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor) 141, an image data memory 142, and a VRAM (Video RAM) 143.

  The VDP 141 has an image data processing function such as a high-speed drawing function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images in the display area of the image display device 5, for example, according to a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120. An image processor that executes image data processing. The image data memory 142 is configured using a non-volatile recording medium such as a semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, a magnetic memory, or an optical memory, and stores various image data indicating a display image on the image display device 5. For example, the image data stored in the image data memory 142 includes a plurality of types of effect images such as a plurality of types of decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5, a still image or a moving image displayed in a reach effect, and the like. Multiple types of corresponding image data are included. The VRAM 143 provides a work area in which image display data created by the VDP 141 is expanded and stored. The VRAM 143 may be built in the VDP 141, or may be configured separately from the VDP 141. The display data expanded and stored in the VRAM 143 may be pixel data (raster data) created by the VDP 141 based on vector data (vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons, for example.

  The sound control unit 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 generates a sound signal based on, for example, sound data transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 and supplies the sound signal to the speakers 8L and 8R. A circuit for outputting is included. The lamp control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 generates a lamp drive signal based on the lamp data transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, such as the game effect lamp 9, various decorative lamps, and LEDs. It includes a circuit that switches on / off by supplying the electric decoration member. Note that the sound control unit 122 and the lamp control unit 123 may be configured by a circuit or the like installed outside the effect control board 12.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 111 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 111 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 113 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 111 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 111 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 111 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36 is started, the CPU 111 first executes a predetermined switch process to thereby change the state of the detection signal input from each of the switches 21 to 23 via the switch circuit 101. Determination is made (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating a part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 111 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display operation control or special in the special symbol display device 4 is controlled. Various processes are selected and executed in order to set the special winning opening / closing operation in the variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 111 executes normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the LED) of the normal symbol display 20 to change the normal symbol variable display (for example, lighting and blinking) and the like. Setting of tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is enabled. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 111 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing a command control process (step S17).

As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the input / output port 115, the effect After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. Then, by turning it off, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. When the command control process is finished, the game control timer interrupt process is finished after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 36 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 111 first executes a start winning determination process (step S100). FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 38, first, the CPU 111 determines whether or not the detection signal from the start opening switch 22 provided corresponding to the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6 is in an ON state. Is determined (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the start port switch 22 is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the number of reserved figure storage, which is the number of reserved data stored in the special figure storage unit 151, is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (eg, “4”) is reached (step S202). At this time, the CPU 111 may specify the special figure reserved memory number by reading the special figure reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the detection signal from the starting port switch 22 is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the number of special figure hold storage is the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes). The start winning determination process is terminated assuming that the start condition for executing the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not satisfied.

  In step S202, when the number of special figure hold storage is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), a process for satisfying the start condition is executed. In this case, for example, 1 is added to the special figure reserved memory number count value, thereby adding 1 to the special figure reserved memory number (step S203). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 114 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step S204). . Numerical value data indicating each random value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit 151, whereby each random number value is stored (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 112 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S206). . The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 36 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is done. After the transmission setting is performed in step S206, the start winning determination process ends.

  After executing the start winning determination process as described above, one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 shown in FIG. 37 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag. The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 based on numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the special symbol storage unit 151 or the like. The process etc. which determine are included. Also, in the special symbol normal process, whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for judging the special symbol display result. A determination is made. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (one of the big hit symbol or the lost symbol) in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 is set corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. .

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the prior determination result whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, the reach determination result whether or not the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state, and the like. A process for determining a type as one of a plurality of types, a process for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 4 and a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts variable display. It is. It is also determined whether the elapsed time thus measured has reached the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the variable display time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the change of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 4 and performing a setting for stopping and displaying the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol. Yes. In the special symbol stop process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. If the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special chart process flag is set. Is updated to “4”. When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. As an example, in the big winning opening opening pre-processing, it is specified whether the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “0” to “2”. Then, when the jackpot type buffer value specified at this time is “0” or “1”, it corresponds to the fact that the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability change”, and in the jackpot gaming state, Is set to “15”, and the upper limit of the period during which the winning prize opening is opened in each round is set to “29 seconds”. In addition, when the specified jackpot type buffer value is “2”, the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened in the jackpot gaming state in correspondence with the jackpot type being “surprise”. In addition to being set to “2”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened in each round is set to “0.5 seconds”.

  The special winning opening opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. As an example, in the special prize opening opening process, a setting for transmitting a special prize opening open designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 when the special prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state. I do. Thereafter, the game detected by the count switch 23 when the elapsed time after the grand prize opening is opened reaches a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.5 seconds) or before the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time. When the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), it is determined that it is time to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a setting for transmitting a designation command after opening the big prize opening from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed. Here, when changing the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state in the big prize opening opening process, a process of starting the supply of a drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. When returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 may be executed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. This post-opening process for the big prize opening is terminated when the number of times that the big prize opening is in the open state has reached the number of round executions or when the maximum number of big winning opening is reached. It includes processing for setting up to send the specified command.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by the electric parts for effects such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process for waiting until the waiting time elapses and a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 111 first determines whether or not the special figure holding storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0” (step S221). As a result, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold storage number that is the number of stored hold data in the special figure hold storage unit 151 is “0”.

  If the special figure holding memory number count value is other than “0” in step S221 (step S221; No), it is determined that the start condition for starting the special figure game by the special symbol display device 4 is satisfied, and the special figure holding is held. The storage unit 151 reads the storage data stored corresponding to the storage number “1” (step S222). At this time, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type need only be read out.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S222, the special figure reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1 from the special figure reserved memory number count value, for example (step S223). Further, in the process of step S223, a random number value as the hold data stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the special figure hold storage unit 151 Data indicating MR1 and MR2 is shifted upward by one entry.

  After executing the process of step S223, the special display result determination table 200 shown in FIG. 10 is selected as a use table for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit”. (Step 224). By referring to the special figure display result determination table 200 set in this way, the CPU 111 sets values in different ranges as jackpot determination value data depending on whether the probability variation flag is OFF or ON (step S225). ). As an example, when the probability variation flag is off, the value in the range of “8001” to “8190” is set as the big hit determination value data, while when the probability variation flag is on, the value in the range of “8001” to “9900” is set. The value is set as big hit judgment value data.

  Thus, in the process of step S225, a value in a different range is set as jackpot determination value data depending on whether the probability variation flag is off or on. After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random value MR1 read in step S222 matches the jackpot determination value data (step S226). As a result, when the probability variation flag is on, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment read out in step S222 has a higher judgment probability than when the probability variation flag is off. In accordance with the data, a determination is made that the variable display result is “big hit”.

  If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S226 (step S226; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S227). ). At this time, the big hit type determination table 201 shown in FIG. 11 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S228). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read in step S222, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the jackpot type determination table 201 set in step S228. (Step S229). In the process of step S229, the jackpot type buffer value may be set to any one of “0” to “2” corresponding to the determined jackpot type.

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value data in step S226 (step S226; No), after executing the process of step S229, it is determined in advance whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. A confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the result and the determination result of the jackpot type (step S230). As an example, if the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value data in step S226, the symbol that becomes the lost symbol corresponding to the prior determination result that the variable display result is “lost” A special symbol of number “10” (a special symbol having a symbol indicating “−”) is set as a confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data in step S226, the special symbols (“1”) of the symbol numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that become the jackpot symbols. ”,“ 3 ”,“ 7 ”special symbols), a special symbol that differs depending on the determination result of the jackpot type in step S228 is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the special symbol with the symbol number “3” is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the big hit type is determined to be “probable change”, the special symbol of the symbol number “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “probable”, the special symbol of symbol number “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S230, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S231), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the special figure reserved memory count value is “0” in step 221 (step S221; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S232), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. . As an example, in the process of step S232, the CPU 111 determines whether or not the demonstration is being displayed. If the demonstration is being displayed, the special symbol normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when the demonstration display is not being performed, for example, setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating display of the demo screen from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 may be performed.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 111 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S241). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S241; Yes), the table selection shown in FIG. 17D is performed based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. According to the setting, one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 205A to 205C, 206A to 206C, and 207A to 207C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types (step S242). ). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  When the big hit flag is OFF in step S241 (step S241; No), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the process shown in FIG. According to the table selection setting shown, one of the reach determination tables 202A to 202C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state (step S243). At this time, for example, the special figure holding memory number is read by reading the special figure holding memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S244). Subsequently, a random value MR3 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S245). Then, it is determined whether the decorative design is “reach” that is derived and displayed in the reach display state or “non-reach” that is not derived and displayed in the reach display state (step S246). In the process of step S246, the CPU 111 may refer to any of the reach determination tables 202A to 202C selected in step S243 based on the reach determination random number MR3 extracted in step S245.

  When the determination result of “reach” is obtained in step S246 (step S246; reach), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. According to the table selection setting shown in D), one of the reach-losing variation pattern type determination tables 204A to 204C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types (step S247). On the other hand, when the determination result of “non-reach” is obtained in step S246 (step S246; non-reach), the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state. Based on the above, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 14D, one of non-reach losing variation pattern type determination tables 203A to 203C is selected as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types. Is set (step S248).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S242, S247, and S248, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S249). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S249, by referring to the use table set in any one of steps S242, S247, and S248, the variation pattern type is selected from any of a plurality of types. (Step S250).

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S250 in this way, a usage table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns according to the variation pattern type is shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B. Select and set one of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as the loss variation pattern determination tables 208A and 208B shown in FIG. 19 and the big hit variation pattern determination tables 209A and 209B shown in FIGS. S251). Subsequently, a random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S252). Then, based on the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S252, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S251 (step S253). .

  Subsequently, a special symbol variable display time is set according to the determination result of the variation pattern in step S253 (step S254). For example, in the process of step S254, the variable display time of the special symbol is specified by referring to a predetermined variation pattern table stored in advance in the ROM 112. Corresponding to the variable display time specified at this time, a timer initial value in a special symbol process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 may be set. In this case, every time the special symbol variation process in step S112 shown in FIG. 37 is executed, for example, the value of the special symbol process timer is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the value becomes “0”. Then, it may be determined that the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol has reached the variable display time. Alternatively, in the processing of step S254, by clearing the special symbol process timer, “0” is set as the timer initial value, and a special symbol variation end determination value corresponding to the variable symbol display time of the special symbol may be set. . In this case, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 37 is executed, for example, the value of the special symbol process timer is updated to be incremented by 1, and the value reaches the special symbol variation end determination value. In this case, it may be determined that the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol has reached the variable display time.

  After the variable display time is set in step S254, a setting for starting variable display of special symbols in the special figure game is performed (step S255). As an example, in the process of step S255, setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4 is performed. Subsequently, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the variable display of special symbols are performed (step S256). For example, the CPU 111 stores a storage address in the ROM 112 of a variable display start command table prepared in advance in order to sequentially transmit a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Setting data indicating (first address) is stored in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. When the setting in step S256 is performed, each time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 36 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. Then, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and the like are sequentially transmitted. When the setting in step S256 is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S257), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 111 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S271). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S271; Yes), the big hit start time waiting time is set (step S272). For example, in the process of step S272, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start production waiting time may be set in the special symbol process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the process of step S272, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S273). For example, in the process of step S273, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 112 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S274). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S275). For example, in step S275, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to turn it off, processing for clearing the probability variation count counter and the time reduction count counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability variation state and the time reduction state, Etc. may be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S276), the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S271 (step S271; No), it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S277). For example, in the process of step S277, when the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, the value of the probability variation number counter or the time reduction number counter is updated by, for example, 1 subtraction or 1 addition. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated count value matches a predetermined special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability variation state or the time reduction state may be terminated by clearing the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag, etc., and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability change flag or the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S277 may be ended. Note that the end determination in step S277 is performed only when the time reduction flag is on and in the time reduction state. For the probability change state where the probability change flag is on, the variable display result is “big hit”. It may be controlled continuously until “ Alternatively, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and referring to a probability change state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 112 or the like. Further, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation state. After executing the process of step S277, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” (step S278), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 42, first, the CPU 111 determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S291). As an example, in the post-opening process for the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 37, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, The value is set in the special symbol process timer. In this case, in the process of step S291, for example, the special symbol process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated special symbol process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. What is necessary is just to determine whether the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S291 (step S291; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S291 (step S291; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S292). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type buffer value read in step S292 is “0” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S293). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “0” (step S293; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the short time state is performed (step S294). As an example, in the process of step S294, the time reduction flag is set to the on state, and the count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. However, what is necessary is just to set to a time-count counter.

  When the big hit type buffer value is other than “0” in step S293 (step S293; No), setting for starting control to the probability variation state is performed (step S295). As an example, in the process of step S295, the probability variation flag is set to the on state, and a predetermined count initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variation state is stored in the probability variation counter. It only has to be set. Note that when the control for changing to the probability changing state is continued until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the probability changing number counter need not be set.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S294 and S295, the special process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S296), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated, and the CPU 131 executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 43 is started, the CPU 131 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 133, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 12. Performs register setting for CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, random number update processing is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating random values counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control are displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but uses a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is obtained from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the signal relay board 13 among the input ports included in the input / output port 136. Capture control signals. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the CPU 131 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined and set according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In this effect control process, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs one of the following processes in steps S160 to S165, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Select and execute.

  The variation start waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variation start waiting process, “left”, “middle”, “right” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 depending on whether or not a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. The process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, and 5R is included. At this time, if it is determined that variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, in response to the start of the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, in order to perform various presentation operations including variable symbol display, the variation pattern and variable display result are displayed. Correspondingly, a process for determining a final decorative symbol, a temporary stop symbol, a main slip pattern, a notice effect, and the like, which are final stop symbols, is included. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, a symbol variation control pattern, a changing effect control pattern, and the like are set based on these determination results. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation process, various types of symbol variation control patterns, varying variation control patterns, and the like corresponding to the value of the representation control process timer (production control process timer value) provided in the representation control timer setting unit 192 are used. The control data is read out, and various kinds of effect control during the variable display of the decorative design are performed. Then, for example, in response to the fact that the production control process timer value has reached a predetermined variable display end value (for example, “0”), the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped. Display. In this way, if the definite decorative design is displayed in a completely stopped state in response to the effect control process timer value becoming the variable display end value, the variable display corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is performed. When the time elapses, the determined display pattern can be derived and displayed autonomously on the side of the effect control board 12 and the variable display result can be determined without relying on the effect control command from the main board 11. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the big hit control effect processing, for example, a big hit effect control pattern corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice data and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound data to the sound control unit 122, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on / off / flashing by outputting lamp data to the lamp control unit 123. That is, a process for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state is included. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” in response to, for example, receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the sound control unit 122. A big hit game such as outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound data to the game, and turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by outputting lamp data to the lamp control unit 123. A process for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the state is included. When the ending effect process ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the CPU 131 first executes a final stop symbol determining process (step S501). The final stop symbol determination process is a process for determining a final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol that is finally derived and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the final stop symbol determination process executed in step S501.

  In the final stop symbol determination process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 131 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” (step S601). For example, in the process of step S601, it may be determined whether or not the variable display result is “lost” by reading variable display result designation data that is EXT data of the variable display result notification command. At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S601; Yes), for example, by reading the variation pattern designation data which is the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern is variable in the decorative design. It is determined whether or not the display mode is a non-reach loss variation pattern corresponding to the case of “non-reach” (step S602).

  If it is determined in step S602 that the pattern is a non-reach loss variation pattern (step S602; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined. At this time, first, the left final stop symbol that is the final symbol that is derived and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L is determined (step S603). In the process of step S603, for example, the final stop symbol determination table 250A shown in FIG. 23A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 250A. After the left final stop symbol is determined in step S603, the right final stop symbol to be a definite decorative symbol derived and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R is determined (step S604). In the process of step S604, for example, the final stop symbol determination table 250B shown in FIG. 23B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 250B. After the right final stop symbol is determined in step S604, the left / right outcome type DC1-1 is specified (step S605). In the process of step S605, the left / right outcome determination table 251 shown in FIG. 24 is selected and set as a use table. Then, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol determined in step S603 and the right final stop symbol determined in step S604, the left / right output type DC1-1 is determined by referring to the left / right output determination table 251. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereby, it is possible to specify which of the left and right eye type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0 to LR26. After that, after determining the middle final stop symbol to be the final symbol that is derived and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display section 5C (step S606), the final stop symbol determination process is terminated. In the process of step S606, for example, the final stop symbol determination table 250C shown in FIG. 23C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 250C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1 specified in step S605, the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 Decide which decorative pattern will be.

  If it is determined in step S602 that the pattern is not a non-reach loss variation pattern (step S602; No), a combination of a fixed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach-losing combination is determined. At this time, first, a left final stop symbol that is a finalized decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, and a finalized decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R; The right final stop symbol is determined (step S607). As an example, in the process of step S607, it is determined whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is either the variation pattern PC3-1 or the variation pattern PC3-2, or another variation pattern. At this time, if the variation pattern is different from the variation pattern PC3-1 and the variation pattern PC3-2, for example, the final stop symbol determination table 250A shown in FIG. 23A is selected and set as the use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 250A. Also, the decorative symbol having the same symbol number as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined as the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PC3-2, the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol are determined as decorative symbols whose symbol number is “9”. As a result, in the variable display of the decorative symbol by the variation pattern PC3-2, the decorative symbol of the symbol number “9” is derived and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, and the decorative symbol is displayed. It is derived and displayed in the reach display state. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PC 3-1, the left final stop symbol is determined as a decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9”. In addition, the decorative symbol having the symbol number “8” that is one smaller than the symbol number “9” of the left final stop symbol is determined as the right final stop symbol. As a result, in the variable display of decorative symbols by the variation pattern PC 3-1, the right final stop symbol derived and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5 R is derived and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5 L. By being one frame before the left final stop symbol, the determined decorative symbol of the reach-losing combination that becomes “−1 frame losing” is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern PC3-1 corresponds to “−1 frame loss”. However, the variation pattern PC3-1 is shifted by an arbitrary number of frames different from this and becomes a reach loss combination. It may be a thing. For example, if the variation pattern PC3-1 corresponds to “+1 frame loss”, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “1” may be determined as the right final stop symbol. As a result, in the variable display of decorative symbols by the variation pattern PC 3-1, the right final stop symbol derived and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5 R is derived and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5 L. The final decorative symbol of the reach-losing combination that is “+1 frame loss” is derived and displayed one frame after the left final stop symbol.

  After the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol are determined in step S607, the middle final stop symbol corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (step S608), and the final stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S608, it is determined whether the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PC3-1 or a variation pattern other than the variation pattern PC3-1. At this time, in the case of the variation pattern PC 3-1, the medium final stop symbol is determined as a decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9”. As a result, in the variable display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern PC 3-1, the decorative symbol of the symbol number “9” is derived and displayed on the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display portions 5 L and 5 C, and the decorative symbol is displayed. It is derived and displayed in the reach display state. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is different from the variation pattern PC3-1, based on the symbol numbers of the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol determined in step S607, the middle final stop according to the variation pattern. What is necessary is just to determine the symbol number of the decoration symbol used as a symbol. For example, if the variation pattern corresponds to “−1 frame loss”, the symbol number is 1 smaller than the symbol numbers of the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol (the symbol numbers of the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol are In the case of “1”, the decorative symbol of symbol number “9”) is determined as the middle final stop symbol. If the variation pattern corresponds to “+1 frame loss”, the decorative symbol having the symbol number one larger than the symbol numbers of the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol is determined as the middle final stop symbol. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern PC3-2 corresponds to “−1 frame loss”, but is shifted by an arbitrary number of frames different from this and becomes a reach loss combination. It may be a thing. For example, if the variation pattern PC3-2 corresponds to “+1 frame loss”, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “1” may be determined as the middle final stop symbol. As a result, in the variable display of the decorative symbols by the variation pattern PC3-2, the middle final stop symbols derived and displayed by the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C are the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L. The final decorative symbol of the reach lose combination that is “+1 frame lost” is derived and displayed one frame after the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol derived and displayed at 5R.

  When it is determined in step S601 that the variable display result is “big hit” instead of “losing” (step S601; No), the big hit type is “accurate” by reading the variable display result designation data, for example. It is determined whether or not (step S609). At this time, if the big hit type is “surprise” (step S609; Yes), whether the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is either the variation pattern PD1-1 or the variation pattern PD1-2, or otherwise. It is determined whether the variation pattern is (step S610). Here, as shown in FIG. 9, in the variation pattern PD1-1 and the variation pattern PD1-2, in accordance with the designation of “non-reach loss”, the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the variable display result of the decorative pattern constitutes the non-reach combination. Therefore, when the pattern is either the variation pattern PD1-1 or the variation pattern PD1-2 (step S610; Yes), the process proceeds to step S608 to determine the final decoration that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination. Determine the combination of symbols.

  When it is determined in step S610 that the variation pattern is different from the variation pattern PD1-1 and the variation pattern PD1-2 (step S610; No), the variation pattern is the variation pattern PD2-1 and the variation pattern PD2-. 2 or any other variation pattern (any one of variation pattern PD3-1 to variation pattern PD3-4) is determined (step S611). Here, as shown in FIG. 9, in the variation pattern PD2-1 and the variation pattern PD2-2, in accordance with the designation of “reach lose”, the finalized decorative symbol that becomes the variable display result of the decorative symbol constitutes the reach lose combination. Therefore, when the pattern is either the variation pattern PD2-1 or the variation pattern PD2-2 (step S611; Yes), the process proceeds to step S607, thereby determining the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol constituting the reach-losing combination. The combination of is determined. In the case of either the variation pattern PD2-1 or the variation pattern PD2-2, it may be determined in advance whether “−1 frame loss” or “+1 frame loss” is set. The determination may be made by executing a lottery process using a random value.

  When it is determined in step S611 that the variation pattern PD2-1 and the variation pattern PD2-2 are different from the variation pattern PD3-1 to the variation pattern PD3-4, the variation pattern PD2-1 and the variation pattern PD2-2 are different (step S611). S611; No), after determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 (step S612), the final stop symbol determination process is terminated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9, the variation pattern PD3-1 to variation pattern PD3-4 are all determined according to the designation of “acceptance chance eyes”, and the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the variable display result of the ornamental pattern is the chance of chance TC1. Any one of TC4 will be comprised. For example, in the process of step S612, the final stop symbol determination table 252C shown in FIG. 26C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 252C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  If it is determined in step S609 that the big hit type is “normal” or “probability change” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (step S609; No), the fluctuation pattern PC4- It is determined whether or not any one of 1 and the variation pattern PC4-2, the variation pattern PC5-1, and the variation pattern PC5-2 are specified (step S613). At this time, if any of the fluctuation pattern PC4-1, the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, the fluctuation pattern PC5-1, and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2 is specified (step S613; Yes), “left”, “middle”, After determining the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol derived and displayed side by side in the “right” decorative symbol variable display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” ( Step S614), the final stop symbol determination process is terminated. Thereby, in the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PC4-1, the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, the fluctuation pattern PC5-1, and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2, the symbol number “9” is set as the confirmed decorative symbol constituting the jackpot combination. ”Is displayed and displayed side by side in the“ left ”,“ middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  If it is determined in step S613 that the variation pattern is different from the variation pattern PC4-1, variation pattern PC4-2, variation pattern PC5-1, variation pattern PC5-2 (step S613; No), the jackpot combination After determining a decorative symbol having a symbol number other than “9” as a confirmed decorative symbol that constitutes (step S615), the final stop symbol determining process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S615, first, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “probable change” by reading variable display result designation data or the like. When the big hit type is “normal”, the final stop symbol determination table 252A shown in FIG. 26A is selected and set as the use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 252A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. When the jackpot type is “probability change”, it is determined whether or not to notify that there is a promotion that becomes a probability change state due to the success promotion effect during jackpot. When executing the jackpot promotion promotion effect, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are performed in the same manner as when the jackpot type is “normal”. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of -3 as a definite ornament design. On the other hand, when the big success promotion effect is not executed, the final stop symbol determination table 252B shown in FIG. 26B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 252B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3 that become one of the probable big hit combinations. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  After executing the final stop symbol determination process as described above in step S501 shown in FIG. 45, the changing effect determination process is executed (step S502). The changing effect determination process is a process for determining the presence or absence of various effect operations performed during variable display of decorative symbols, the effect mode, and the like. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing effect determination process executed in step S502.

  47, first, the CPU 131 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern capable of executing “one pseudo-continuous” (step). S631). Here, any one of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1, fluctuation pattern PA2-2, fluctuation pattern PA3-1, fluctuation pattern PB3-1, fluctuation pattern PC3-1, fluctuation pattern PC3-2 shown in FIG. 8 is a fluctuation pattern designation command. Is specified, it is determined that “pseudo-ream once” can be executed. Also, the fluctuation pattern PA2-5, fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB5-1, fluctuation pattern PC4-1, fluctuation pattern PC4-2, fluctuation pattern PC5-1, fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. When one of the PC 5-2, the fluctuation pattern PD1-1, the fluctuation pattern PD2-1, and the fluctuation pattern PD3-1 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, it is determined that the “pseudo continuous once” can be executed. Is done.

  If it is determined in step S631 that the variation pattern can execute “pseudo-run once” (step S631; Yes), the pseudo-run once execution determination table 253 shown in FIG. 27 is selected as a use table. And set (step S632). Then, for example, by referring to the pseudo-run once execution determination table 253 based on the numerical data indicating the pseudo-run once execution determination random value SR2 extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, it is determined whether or not “there is a pseudo-ream” (step S633). If it is determined in step S631 that the fluctuation pattern is not such that “pseudo-run once” can be executed (step S631; No), the “pseudo-run” rendering operation different from “pseudo-run once” is performed. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is to execute (Step S633). Here, the variation pattern PA3-4 and the variation pattern PB3-4 shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern PA4-4, the variation pattern PB4-4, the variation pattern PB5-4, and the variation pattern PD3-3 shown in FIG. When any of the variation patterns whose “main designated effect” is “twice pseudo-continuous” is designated by the variation pattern designation command, it is determined that the “pseudo-continuous” effect operation is executed. Further, like a fluctuation pattern PA3-5 and a fluctuation pattern PB3-5 shown in FIG. 8, a fluctuation pattern PA4-5, a fluctuation pattern PB4-5, a fluctuation pattern PB5-5, and a fluctuation pattern PD3-4 shown in FIG. It is determined that the “pseudo-continuous” rendering operation is also executed when a variation pattern whose “main designated rendering” is “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated by the variation pattern designation command. Further, any of the variation patterns in which the “main designated effect” is “quasi-continuous 4 times”, such as the variation pattern PB3-6 illustrated in FIG. 8, the variation pattern PB4-6, and the variation pattern PB5-6 illustrated in FIG. Even when the kana is designated by the variation pattern designation command, it is determined to perform the “pseudo-continuous” rendering operation.

  When it is determined in any of the processes of steps S633 and S634 that there is “pseudo-continuous” for performing the “pseudo-continuous” rendering operation (step S633; Yes, or step S634; Yes), pseudo-temporary temporary stop A symbol determination process is executed (step S635). FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination process executed in step S635.

  In the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination process shown in FIG. 48, the CPU 131 first sets the number of pseudo consecutive times corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command in the variable M (step S651). As an example, when it is determined in step S633 shown in FIG. 47 that “pseudo-continuous” is present, the number of pseudo-continues “1” corresponding to “one pseudo-continuous” is set in the variable M. After that, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 29A, a use table corresponding to the value of the variable M and the number of pseudo consecutive times in the variation pattern is selected and set (step S652). Subsequently, the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbol which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is determined as a temporary stop symbol (step S653). As an example, in the process of step S653, random numbers SR3-1 to SR3-4 for determining the first to fourth pseudo-simultaneous temporary stop symbols updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Are extracted from the numerical data indicating the random number value corresponding to the usage table selected in step S652. That is, when either the temporary stop TG1-1 or the temporary stop TG1-2 shown in FIG. 28 is selected in the use table in step S652, the first pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random number SR3- Numerical data indicating 1 is extracted. On the other hand, when the temporary stop TG2 is selected in the use table, numerical data indicating the random value SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is extracted. When the temporary stop TG3 is selected in the use table, numerical data indicating the random number value SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is extracted. When the temporary stop TG4 is selected in the use table, numerical data indicating the random number value SR3-4 for determining the fourth pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the use table selected in step S652 based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random number value, the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols that become one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped. Determine as a symbol.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable M is “1” (step S654). At this time, if the value of the variable M is “1” (step S654; Yes), the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the variable M is a value other than “1” (step S654; No), the value of the variable M is updated to be decremented by 1 (step S655), and then the process returns to the process of step S652. .

  When it is determined in any of the processes in steps S633 and S634 that there is no “pseudo-continuous” rendering operation (step S633; No or step S634; No), in step S635 After execution of the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the “main slip” effect is executed (step S636). Here, among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, when a variation pattern whose “main designation effect” is “main slip” is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the “main slip” effect operation is executed. Then, it is determined. Then, when it is determined that “no main slip” is not performed (“No main slip”) (step S636; No), the sub slip execution determination table 255 shown in FIG. 30 is selected and set as a use table (step S636). S637). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not “sub-slip” is performed to execute the “sub-slip” effect operation (step S638). As an example, in the process of step S638, numerical data indicating the sub-slip execution determination random value SR4 updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4, the sub-slip execution determination table 255 is referred to determine whether “no sub-slip” or “with sub-slip”. Thus, in the process of step S638, when it is determined that “no main slip” is determined in step S636, it is determined whether or not “sub slip is present”. As a result, only when the “main slip” effect operation is not executed, the “sub slip” effect operation can be executed, and the “main slip” effect operation and the “sub slip” effect operation conflict. Can prevent inconvenience.

  When it is determined in step S636 that “main slip” is to be performed to perform the “main slip” effect operation (step S636; Yes), the main slip pattern determination table 256 shown in FIG. 31 is selected and set as a use table. (Step S639). Subsequently, the main slip pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S640). As an example, in the process of step S640, numerical data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the main slip pattern updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted. Then, by referring to the main slip pattern determination table 256 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR5, any one of the main slip pattern MS1-1 to main slip pattern MS1-3 and main slip pattern MS2-1 is referred to. decide.

  When it is determined in step S638 that “sub slip is present” (step S638; Yes), after the main slip pattern is determined in step S640, pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination processing is executed (step S641). FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination process executed in step S641.

  In the pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 131 first determines whether or not the “sub-slip” effect operation is executed (step S671). At this time, if the effect operation of “sub-slip” is executed (step S671; Yes), the timing for changing the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern is determined by the effect operation (slide effect) (step S672). . For example, when the “pseudo-continuous” effect operation is executed, it is only necessary to determine how many times the change (pseudo-continuous change) is to be executed. Subsequently, a post-slip stop symbol that is derived and displayed after the “sub-slip” effect operation is executed (step S673). As an example, when the “pseudo-continuous” effect operation is not executed, or when the “pseudo-continuous” effect operation is executed, the slip effect is executed after the last pseudo-continuous change is executed. The right final stop symbol that becomes the final symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R may be specified as the post-slip symbol. Further, when the “pseudo-run” effect operation is executed, if the slip effect is executed before the last pseudo-continuous change is executed, the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R is executed after the slip effect is executed. The right temporary stop symbol displayed as a temporary stop at may be specified as the post-slip stop symbol.

  After the process of step S673 is executed, depending on whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” or “reach” (including the case where the variable display result is “big hit”), FIG. Is selected and set as a use table (step S674). That is, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a non-reach loss variation pattern, the temporary stop TS1 table is selected and set as a use table. On the other hand, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a reach loss variation pattern or a big hit variation pattern, the temporary stop TS2 table is selected and set as a use table.

  If it is determined in step S671 that the “sub-slip” effect operation is not executed (step S671; No), the final decoration symbol that is the final stop symbol is specified as the “main slide” effect operation is executed. (Step S675). Here, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the “main designated effect” is “main slip”, the “pseudo-continuous” effect operation is not executed. Therefore, the post-slip stop symbol that is derived and displayed after the “main slip” effect operation is executed is included in the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol. Therefore, in the process of step S675, the post-slip stop symbol that is derived and displayed after the “main slip” effect operation can be specified by specifying the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol. Following the processing in step S675, it is determined whether or not the main slip pattern MS1-1 has been determined in step S640 shown in FIG. 47 (step S676). At this time, if the main sliding pattern MS1-1 is determined (step S676; Yes), the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” or “reach” (when the variable display result is “big hit”) Is included) (step S677). For example, in the process of step S677, whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a non-reach loss variation pattern, a reach loss variation pattern, or a big hit variation pattern is determined to be “non-reach”. What is necessary is just to determine whether it is "reach".

  When it is determined in step S677 that it is “non-reach” (step S677; non-reach), the temporary stop TM1-1 table shown in FIG. 32 is selected and set as a use table (step S678). On the other hand, when it is determined to be “reach” (step S677; reach), the temporary stop TM1-2 table shown in FIG. 32 is selected and set as a use table (step S679). After the use table is selected in steps S674, S678, and S679, the right temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R when the slip effect is executed is determined (step S680). For example, when the table of temporary stop TS1 is selected in step S674, the random value SR6 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the first slip updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Numerical data indicating -1 is extracted. Then, the right temporary stop symbol LZ1 in the “sub-slip” effect operation is determined by referring to the table of temporary stop TS1 based on the extracted random number SR6-1 and the stop symbol specified in step S673. If the table of temporary stop TS2 is selected in step S674, the random value SR6-2 for determining the second temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. The numerical data indicating is extracted. Then, the right temporary stop symbol LZ1 in the “sub-slip” effect operation is determined by referring to the temporary stop TS2 table based on the extracted random number SR6-2 and the stop symbol specified in step S673. Further, when the table of temporary stop TM1-1 is selected in step S678, the third slip temporary stop symbol determination disorder updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Numerical data representing the numerical value SR6-3 is extracted. Then, based on the extracted random number SR6-3 and the stop symbol specified in step S675, with reference to the table of temporary stop TM1-1, the right temporary in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-1. The stop symbol LZ2 is determined. When the table of temporary stop TM1-2 is selected in step S679, the random value SR6 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the fourth slip updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Numerical data indicating -4 is extracted. Then, based on the extracted random number SR6-4 and the stop symbol specified in step S675, with reference to the table of temporary stop TM1-2, the right temporary in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-1. The stop symbol LZ2 is determined.

  If it is determined in step S676 other than the main slip pattern MS1-1 (step S676; No), it is either the main slip pattern MS1-2 or the main slip pattern MS1-3, or any other main slip. It is determined whether it is a pattern (main slip pattern MS2-1) (step S681). At this time, if it is either the main slip pattern MS1-2 or the main slip pattern MS1-3 (step S681; Yes), the temporary stop TM1-3 table shown in FIG. 33 is selected and set as a use table ( Step S682). Subsequently, a left temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L when the slip effect is executed is determined (step S683). For example, in the process of step S683, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-5 for determining the fifth slip temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and selected in step S682. With reference to the table of the temporary stop TM1-3, the left temporary stop symbol LZ3-1 in the "main slip" effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-2 or the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined.

  After the left temporary stop symbol is determined in step S683, the temporary stop TM1-4 table shown in FIG. 33 is selected and set as a use table (step S684). Subsequently, the right temporary stop symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R when the slip effect is executed is determined (step S685). For example, in the process of step S685, numeric data indicating the random number SR6-6 for determining the sixth temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and selected in step S684. With reference to the table of temporary stop TM1-4, the right temporary stop symbol LZ3-2 in the "main slip" effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-2 or the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the main slip pattern MS1-3 is set (step S686). At this time, when it is determined that it is not the main slip pattern MS1-3 due to the main slip pattern MS1-2 (step S686; No), the slip temporary stop symbol determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined in step S686 (step S686; Yes), the left temporary stop symbol determined in step S683 and the right temporary stop symbol determined in step S685. The left and right output types based on the combination are specified (step S687). For example, in step S687, based on the combination of the left temporary stop symbol and the right temporary stop symbol, the left / right output type DC1-1 is set to any one of LR0 to LR26 with reference to the left / right output determination table 251 shown in FIG. Identify whether it applies. Subsequently, the final stop symbol determination table 250C shown in FIG. 23C is selected and set as a use table (step S688). Then, after the intermediate temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display section 5C when the slip effect is executed is determined (step S689), the temporary stop symbol determination process at the time of slip is ended. For example, in the process of step S689, numerical data indicating the random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and selected in step S688. With reference to the final stop symbol determination table 250C, the intermediate temporary stop symbol in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined. In this way, in the process of step S689, using the final stop symbol determination table 250C that is referred to in order to determine the final decorative symbol that will be the final stop symbol, the main slip pattern MS1-3 performs the “main slip” effect operation. A temporary stop symbol can be determined.

  If it is determined in step S681 that the main slip pattern MS2-1 is neither the main slip pattern MS1-2 nor the main slip pattern MS1-3 (step S681; No), it is shown in FIG. The table of temporary stop TM2-1 is selected and set as a use table (step S690). Subsequently, a left temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L when the slip effect is executed is determined (step S691). For example, in the process of step S691, numeric data indicating the random value SR6-7 for determining the seventh slip temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and selected in step S690. With reference to the table of temporary stop TM2-1, the left temporary stop symbol LZ3-1 in the "main slip" effect operation by the main slip pattern MS2-1 is determined.

  After the left temporary stop symbol is determined in step S691, the temporary stop TM2-2 table shown in FIG. 33 is selected and set as a use table (step S692). Subsequently, a right temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R when the slip effect is executed is determined (step S693). For example, in the process of step S693, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-8 for determining the eighth temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and selected in step S692. With reference to the table of the temporary stop TM2-2, the right temporary stop symbol in the effect operation of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS2-1 is determined. After that, the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” is determined to be the intermediate temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C when the slip effect is executed (step S694). The slip temporary stop symbol determination process is terminated. In this way, in the process of step S694, the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” is determined as the intermediate temporary stop symbol, so that the “medium” decorative symbol of the “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS2-1 is performed. After the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 5C, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed is changed.

  When it is determined in step S638 shown in FIG. 47 that “sub-slip is not present” and “sub-slip is present” or not (step S638; No), pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination processing is performed in step S641. After the execution, the presence / absence of an effect operation as a notice effect and the notice pattern in the case of executing the notice effect are determined (step S642). For example, in the process of step S642, it is determined whether or not the “main designated effect” in the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is “main notice”. At this time, if the “main designated effect” is “main notice”, one of a plurality of main notice patterns prepared in advance for executing the “main notice” effect operation is selected as a use pattern. do it. More specifically, by extracting numerical data serving as a random value for determining the main notice pattern from a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 and referring to a main notice pattern determination table prepared in advance. The main notice pattern may be determined as one of a plurality of types. Also, in the process of step S642, it is determined whether or not to perform the “sub-notice” effect operation. For example, by extracting numerical data serving as a random value for sub-notice execution determination from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 and referring to a sub-notice execution determination table prepared in advance, “sub-notice It is only necessary to determine whether or not to perform the production operation “”. When the “sub-notice” effect operation is executed, one of a plurality of types of sub-notice patterns prepared in advance to execute the “sub-notice” effect operation is selected as the use pattern. That's fine. More specifically, numerical value data that is a random value for determining the sub-notice pattern is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the sub-notice pattern determination table that has been previously used is referred to. Thus, the sub-notice pattern may be determined as one of a plurality of types.

  After executing the process of step S642, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is any one of the variation pattern PC3-2, variation pattern PC4-2, variation pattern PC5-2, or other variation pattern. Is determined (step S643). At this time, if it is a variation pattern other than the variation pattern PC 3-2, the variation pattern PC 4-2, and the variation pattern PC 5-2 (step S 643; No), the variation effect determination process is terminated. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the variation pattern PC3-2, the variation pattern PC4-2, and the variation pattern PC5-2 perform the derivation display of the decorative symbols in the special derivation order, and the “left” and “right” decorations are displayed. The decorative symbols having the symbol number “9” are derived and displayed side by side on the symbol display portions 5L and 5C, whereby the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state. Therefore, before the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state, it is necessary to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbol on the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C. Therefore, if the pattern is any one of the variation pattern PC 3-2, the variation pattern PC 4-2, and the variation pattern PC 5-2 (step S 643; Yes), “medium” before the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state. After determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol temporarily displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 5C (step S644), the changing effect determination process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S644, the final stop symbol determination table 250A shown in FIG. 23A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and determined with reference to the final stop symbol determination table 250A. The left final stop symbol FZ1-1 may be used as the intermediate temporary stop symbol. In this way, the intermediate temporary stop symbol can be determined using the final stop symbol determination table 250A that is referred to in order to determine the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol.

  After executing the changing effect determination process as described above in step S502 shown in FIG. 45, one of the plurality of types of effect control patterns is selected and set as a use pattern (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the determination result of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous once” effect operation in step S633 shown in FIG. Select one of a plurality of types of symbol fluctuation control patterns stored in the symbol fluctuation control pattern table 261 shown in FIG. And set it as a usage table. Further, in the process of step S503, depending on the determination result of whether or not the “main notice” or “sub notice” effect operation is executed, the main notice pattern or the sub notice pattern in the case of execution, FIG. One of a plurality of changing effect control patterns stored in the changing effect control pattern table 262 shown in A) is selected and set as a use table.

  Subsequently, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the effect control process timer set value indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in step S503 (step S503). S504). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern to the display control unit 121, “left”, “middle”, and the like provided in the display area of the image display device 5 Settings for starting the variation of various symbols in the image display device 5 such as starting variable display of the decorative symbols in all of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are performed (step S505). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S506), and then the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process, the CPU 131 first updates the effect control process timer value by, for example, subtracting 1 (step S511). At this time, whether or not it matches any of the timer judgment values by comparing the updated presentation control process timer value with various timer judgment values indicated by the symbol fluctuation control pattern or the fluctuation presentation control pattern Is determined (step S512). And if it does not correspond to any timer judgment value (step S512; No), the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  If the timer determination value is matched in step S512 (step S512; Yes), various control data (display control data, Voice control data, lamp control data, etc.) are read out (step S513). Here, when a plurality of timer determination values indicated by the symbol variation control pattern and the changing effect control pattern match with the effect control process timer value in the process of step S512, they are associated with the matched timer determination values. The plurality of stored control data may be read in step S513. Then, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S513 is control data predetermined as an end code (step S514). At this time, if it is determined that the code is an end code (step S514; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set (step S1). S515). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the process at the end of decoration symbol variation (step S516), the process during decoration symbol variation is terminated. If it is determined in step S514 that the code is not an end code (step S514; No), an effect control command process is performed to perform a command or setting according to the control data read in step S513. From (step S517), the decorative symbol variation processing is terminated.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control command process executed in step S517 of FIG. In this effect control command process, the CPU 131 first specifies the type of control data read in step S513 shown in FIG. 50 from display control data, audio control data, and lamp control data (step S701). . Then, it is determined whether or not the type of control data specified in step S701 is voice control data (step S702). At this time, when it is determined that the data is voice control data (step S702; Yes), the voice data created according to the read voice control data is transmitted from the input / output port 136 to the sound control unit 122 (step). S703). If it is determined in step S702 that the data is not voice control data (step S702; No), or after executing the process of step S703, is the type of control data specified in step S701 a lamp control data? It is determined whether or not (step S704).

  If it is determined in step S704 that the data is lamp control data (step S704; Yes), the lamp data created according to the read lamp control data is transmitted from the input / output port 136 to the lamp control unit 123 ( Step S705). If it is determined in step S704 that the data is not lamp control data (step S704; No), or after executing the process of step S705, is the type of control data specified in step S701 a display control data? It is determined whether or not (step S706). At this time, when it is determined that it is not display control data (step S706; No), the effect control command process is terminated. If it is determined in step S706 that the data is display control data, the display control command process is executed (step S707), and the effect control command process is terminated.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the display control command process executed in step S707 of FIG. In this display control command processing, the CPU 131 first, for example, displays the sprite image from the display control data read from the display control pattern included in the design variation control pattern or the variation production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value. It is determined whether or not the update timing has come (step S721). At this time, if it is the update timing of the sprite image (step S721; Yes), the setting for updating the sprite image is performed (step S722). For example, in the process of step S722, the image data read position (read address) in the image data memory 142, the image data write position (write address) in the VRAM 143, the amount of image data, and the like are specified. Subsequently, a display control command corresponding to the specific content is created and transmitted from the input / output port 136 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121.

  If it is not the timing for updating the sprite image in step S721 (step S721; No), or after executing the processing in step S722, whether or not to start playback and display of moving images in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Is determined (step S723). At this time, for example, by referring to the display control data read from the display control pattern included in the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, it is determined whether or not to start the reproduction display of the moving image. Just do it. If it is determined in step S723 that moving image reproduction display is to be started (step S723; Yes), settings for starting moving image reproduction display are performed (step S724). For example, in the process of step S724, a display control command for instructing start of playback and display of moving images is created according to the display control data read from the display control pattern, and transmitted from the input / output port 136 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. .

  When it is determined in step S723 that it is not the start of moving image reproduction display (step S723; No), it is determined whether or not it is the decoding timing of the moving image data after the processing of step S724 is executed ( Step S725). For example, in the process of step S725, the display control data read from the display control pattern included in the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value or the event interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121 is turned on. What is necessary is just to determine whether it became the decoding timing of moving image data by determining whether it became a state. At this time, when it is determined that it is the decoding timing of the moving image data (step S725; Yes), setting for decoding the moving image data is performed (step S726). For example, in the processing of step S726, a predetermined display control command such as a moving image decoding command is created and transmitted from the input / output port 136 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121.

  If it is determined in step S725 that it is not the timing for decoding moving image data (step S725; No), after executing the processing in step S726, it is determined whether or not to end the reproduction display of the moving image ( Step S727). At this time, for example, by referring to the display control data read from the display control pattern included in the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, it is determined whether or not to start the reproduction display of the moving image. Just do it. If it is determined in step S727 that the playback / display of the moving image is to be ended (step S727; Yes), settings for ending the playback / display of the moving image are performed (step S728). For example, in the process of step S728, a display control command for instructing the end of playback and display of the moving image is generated according to the display control data read from the display control pattern, and transmitted from the input / output port 136 to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. . If it is determined in step S727 that the playback / display of the moving image has not ended (step S727; No), the display control command process ends after the process of step S728 is executed.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the effect control board 12, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, step S505 in FIG. 45 or steps S722 and S724 in FIG. , S726, S728, etc., a predetermined display control command is supplied to the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. As a result, the decorative symbols are variably displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. Each variation pattern is assigned a time schedule that indicates how the decorative symbol is changed according to the content of the effect. The variable display of the decorative symbol is for effect control according to the selected time schedule. It is executed in cooperation with the CPU 131 of the microcomputer 120 and the VDP 141 of the display control unit 121. This time schedule is determined in advance by, for example, display control data included in the display control pattern in the symbol variation control pattern stored corresponding to each variation pattern in the symbol variation control pattern table 261 shown in FIG. It only has to be done.

  In this embodiment, when a change pattern designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs the changing effect determining process in step S502 shown in FIG. Run. In the changing effect determination process, the contents of effects in the “main slip” and “sub slip” effect operations are determined by executing the processes of steps S636 to S641 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 53 shows a case where the effect display of the “sub-slip” is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern from which the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is derived and displayed until the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern FIG. Each process shown in FIG. 53 is, for example, based on the design fluctuation control pattern and the changing effect control pattern set by executing the process in step S503 shown in FIG. 45, while the decorative design is changing in step S162 shown in FIG. 50 may be realized by executing the effect control command process in step S517 shown in FIG. 50 or the decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 shown in FIG. FIG. 54 shows an execution example of effect display in the display area of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress example of the effect operation shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a pre-determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; No) in which the variable display result is “losing” and a reach determination result in which the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S246 in FIG. 40). ; Non-reach), in step S253 shown in FIG. 40, when a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern other than the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 shown in FIG. Since it is not performed (step S636 of FIG. 47; No), the effect operation of “sub slip” can be executed. Further, based on the pre-determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “surprise”, step S253 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern PD1-1, the variation pattern PD3-1, the variation pattern PD3-3, or the variation pattern PD3-4 shown in FIG. 9 is determined, the variable display result of the decorative symbol is determined as the non-reach combination. Since the decoration pattern or the determined chance pattern TC1 to TC4 is formed, and the “main slip” effect operation is not executed (step S636; No in FIG. 47), the “sub-slip” effect operation is performed. It becomes executable.

  In the process shown in FIG. 53, first, all symbol variations are started (step ST11). For example, as shown in FIG. 54A, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. The variable display starts. Thereafter, the left final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST12). For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the left final stop symbol that becomes the final symbol design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L. The left last stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is that the variable display result is “lost” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” (step S602; Yes). Accordingly, the decorative symbol determined by referring to the final stop symbol determining table 250A illustrated in FIG. 23A in step S603 illustrated in FIG. 46 may be used. Then, according to the setting in the final stop symbol determination table 250A as shown in FIG. 23A, the left final stop symbol is determined as a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9”. Alternatively, the left final stop symbol is the variation pattern PD1-1 when the variable display result is “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S609; Yes). Depending on (step S610; Yes), the decorative design determined in step S603 shown in FIG. 46 may be used. Furthermore, the left final stop symbol has a variation pattern PD3-1 and a variation when the variable display result is “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S609; Yes). In response to being one of the pattern PD3-3 and the variation pattern PD3-4 (step S611; No), the decoration that constitutes one of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4 determined in step S612 shown in FIG. It may be a symbol.

  Following the derivation and display of the left final stop symbol in step ST12, the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST13). The right temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is a table of the temporary stop TS1 shown in FIG. 32 selected in step S674 shown in FIG. 49 in response to the variable display result of the decorative symbol being a non-reach combination. The decorative symbol determined in step S680 by referring to it. The right temporary stop symbol is determined as a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9” by the setting in the temporary stop TS1 table as shown in FIG. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 54C, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R.

  After the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST13, the right symbol change effect is performed in the “sub slip” effect operation (step ST14). For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), the decorative symbol temporarily displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R is changed by scrolling again. Thus, after the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R, the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST15). For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (E), the right final stop symbol that becomes the final symbol design is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. The right final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is that the variable display result is “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S602; Yes). Accordingly, the decorative symbol determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 250B illustrated in FIG. 23B in step S604 illustrated in FIG. 46 may be used. Then, according to the setting in the final stop symbol determination table 250B as shown in FIG. 23B, the right final stop symbol is determined as a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9”. Further, it is possible to prevent the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol from being derived and displayed in the reach display state. Alternatively, the right final stop symbol is the variation pattern PD1-1 when the variable display result is “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S609; Yes). Depending on (step S610; Yes), the decorative design determined in step S604 shown in FIG. 46 may be used. Furthermore, the left final stop symbol has a variation pattern PD3-1 and a variation when the variable display result is “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S609; Yes). In response to being one of the pattern PD3-3 and the variation pattern PD3-4 (step S611; No), the decoration that constitutes one of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4 determined in step S612 shown in FIG. It may be a symbol.

  Subsequently, the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST16). For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (F), the middle final stop symbol that becomes the confirmed ornament symbol is derived and displayed on the “middle” ornament symbol display portion 5C. The middle final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is that the variable display result is “lost” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” (step S602; Yes). Accordingly, the decorative symbol determined by referring to the final stop symbol determining table 250C illustrated in FIG. 23C in step S606 illustrated in FIG. 46 may be used. Then, according to the settings in the final stop symbol determination table 250C as shown in FIG. 23C and the left and right outcome determination table 251 as shown in FIG. 24, the left final stop symbol is determined as a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9”. In addition, a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. 25 can be prevented. Alternatively, the middle final stop symbol is the fluctuation pattern PD1-1 when the variable display result is “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S609; Yes). Depending on (step S610; Yes), the decorative design determined in step S606 shown in FIG. 46 may be used. Furthermore, the left final stop symbol has a variation pattern PD3-1 and a variation when the variable display result is “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S609; Yes). In response to being one of the pattern PD3-3 and the variation pattern PD3-4 (step S611; No), the decoration that constitutes one of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4 determined in step S612 shown in FIG. It may be a symbol.

  Thereafter, for example, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value or the effect control process timer value itself (step ST17). If the variable display time has not elapsed in step ST17 (step ST17; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display (step ST18), and return to the process of step ST17. Thereby, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols is continued until the variable display time elapses. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed in step ST17 (step ST17; Yes), the decorative symbol variable display result is confirmed by displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped (step ST19). For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (G), the decorative symbols are displayed in a completely stopped manner on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Confirm the variable display result.

  In this way, when the “sub-slip” effect operation is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols from which the fixed decorative symbols constituting the non-reach combination fixed decorative symbols or the random chance symbols TC1 to TC4 are derived and displayed. After the start of all symbol changes, decorative symbols other than the symbol number “9” are temporarily displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R, and stopped at the right symbol change effect by scroll display etc. The displayed decorative symbol is changed, and a finalized decorative symbol that is the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed. Then, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined and displayed as non-reach combination finalized decorative symbols and confirmation chance items TC1 to TC4. The decorative symbol is configured not to include the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9”.

  FIG. 55 shows an end of display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started when the effect of “sub-sliding” is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol from which the definite decorative symbol of the reach lose combination or the jackpot combination is derived and displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the advancing example of production | presentation operation | movement until it does. FIG. 56 shows an execution example of the effect display in the display area of the image display device 5 according to the progress example of the effect operation shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; No) in which the variable display result is “losing”, and a reach determination result (step S246 in FIG. 40) in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. 40), in step S253 shown in FIG. 40, reach loss variation patterns other than the variation pattern PA2-3, variation pattern PA2-4, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-2 shown in FIG. When determined, the effect operation of “main slip” is not executed (step S636 of FIG. 47; No), so that the effect operation of “sub slip” can be executed. Further, based on the prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, FIG. In step S253, the fluctuation pattern PA2-6, fluctuation pattern PA4-2, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, fluctuation pattern PB5-2, fluctuation pattern PC4-1, fluctuation pattern PC4-2, fluctuation pattern PC5- shown in FIG. When the big hit fluctuation pattern other than 1 and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2 is determined as the usage pattern, the definite decorative symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed in the normal derivation order, and the effect operation of “main slip” is executed. Since it is not performed (step S636 of FIG. 47; No), the effect operation of “sub slip” can be executed. Furthermore, based on the pre-determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result in which the big hit type is “surprise”, in step S253 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern PD2-1 shown in FIG. 5 is determined to be the use pattern, the variable display result of the decorative pattern becomes the fixed decorative pattern of the reach-losing combination, and the “main slip” effect operation is not executed (step S636 in FIG. 47; No), the “sub-slip” effect operation can be executed.

  In the process shown in FIG. 55, first, all symbol variations are started (step ST21). For example, as shown in FIG. 56A, the decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. The variable display starts. Thereafter, the left final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST22). For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the left final stop symbol that becomes the final symbol design is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L. The left final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time corresponds to the fact that the variable display result is “lost” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” (step S602; No). 46 may be a decorative symbol determined by referring to, for example, the final stop symbol determining table 250A shown in FIG. 23A in step S607 shown in FIG. Alternatively, in the left final stop symbol, the variable display result is “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No), the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” (step S609; No), and the variation pattern PC4-1 and In response to the fact that the variation pattern is different from the variation pattern PC4-2, variation pattern PC5-1, and variation pattern PC5-2 (step S613; No), in step S615 shown in FIG. 46, for example, FIG. The decorative symbol determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 252A or the final stop symbol determination table 252B illustrated in FIG. Furthermore, the left final stop symbol is the variation pattern PD2-1 when the variable display result is “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S609; Yes). Depending on the situation (step S611; Yes), the decorative design determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 46 may be used.

  Subsequently, the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST23). The right temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the temporary stop TS2 shown in FIG. 32 selected in step S674 shown in FIG. 49 in response to the variable display result of the decorative symbol being a reach lose combination or a jackpot combination. The decorative design determined in step S680 by referring to the table. Then, the right temporary stop symbol is determined as a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9” by the setting in the temporary stop TS2 table as shown in FIG. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 56C, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R.

  After the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST23, the right symbol change effect is performed in the “sub-slip” effect operation (step ST24). For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), the decorative symbol temporarily displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R is changed by scroll display again. Thus, after the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R is performed, the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST25). For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), the right final stop symbol that becomes the final symbol design is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. The right final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time corresponds to the fact that the variable display result is “lost” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” (step S602; No). Then, in step S607 shown in FIG. 46, for example, it may be determined so as to be the same decorative design as the left final stop symbol. Alternatively, the right final stop symbol has a variable display result of “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and a big hit type “normal” or “probable change” (step S609; No), and the variation pattern PC4-1 and In response to the fact that the variation pattern is different from the variation pattern PC4-2, variation pattern PC5-1 and variation pattern PC5-2 (step S613; No), in step S615 shown in FIG. You may determine so that it may become the same decorative design. Furthermore, the right final stop symbol is the fluctuation pattern PD2-1 when the variable display result is “big hit” (step S601; No in FIG. 46) and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S609; Yes). Depending on the situation (step S611; Yes), the decorative design determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 46 may be used. As a result, the same decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. Therefore, for example, by performing an effect display of “reach!” As shown in FIG. 56F, it is notified that the decorative symbol has been derived and displayed in the reach display state. Thereafter, a reach effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed (step ST26).

  When the reach effect executed in step ST26 ends, the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST27). The middle final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time corresponds to the fact that the variable display result is “losing” (step S601; Yes in FIG. 46) and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” (step S602; No). The decorative design determined in step S608 shown in FIG. In step S608, the final decorative symbol constituting the reach-losing combination can be set by determining the middle final stop symbol according to the variation pattern. Alternatively, the intermediate final stop symbol has a variable display result of “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and a big hit type “normal” or “probability change” (step S609; No), and the variation pattern PC4-1 and In response to the fact that the fluctuation pattern is different from the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, the fluctuation pattern PC5-1, and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2 (step S613; No), in step S615 shown in FIG. It may be determined so as to be the same decorative design as the final stop symbol. In step S615, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 252A shown in FIG. 26 (A) or the final stop symbol determination table 252B shown in FIG. 26 (B), from among the decorative symbols other than the symbol number “9”. Then, it is possible to determine a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. Furthermore, the left final stop symbol is the variation pattern PD2-1 when the variable display result is “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S609; Yes). Depending on the situation (step S611; Yes), the decorative design determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 46 may be used.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step ST28). If the variable display time has not elapsed in step ST28 (step ST28; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R Display (step ST29) and return to the process of step ST28. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed in step ST28 (step ST28; Yes), the decorative symbol variable display result is confirmed by displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped (step ST30).

  In this way, when the effect of “sub-slip” is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol from which the definite decorative symbol of the reach-losing combination or the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the “right” In the decorative symbol display section 5R, a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9” is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the change of the right symbol by scroll display or the like is changed, and the right final stop symbol is displayed. A definite decorative design is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 57 shows a variable display of decorative symbols when the effect of performing “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-1 is executed during variable display of decorative symbols from which a fixed decorative symbol of non-reach combination is derived and displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advancing of production | presentation operation | movement until it is complete | finished from starting. FIG. 58 shows an execution example of the effect display in the display area of the image display device 5 according to the progress example of the effect operation shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a pre-determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; No) in which the variable display result is “losing” and a reach determination result in which the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S246 in FIG. 40). ; Non-reach), when the variation pattern PA1-4 shown in FIG. 8 is determined to be the use pattern in step S253 shown in FIG. 40, the effect operation of “main slip” is executed. Then, in step S640 shown in FIG. 47, by referring to the main slip pattern determination table 256 shown in FIG. 31 selected in step S639, 191/191 (100%) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 is obtained. The main slip pattern MS1-1 is determined at the determined ratio. Further, based on the pre-determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “surprise”, step S253 shown in FIG. When any one of the variation pattern PD1-2 and variation pattern PD3-2 shown in FIG. 9 is determined as the usage pattern, the variable display result of the decoration pattern is a fixed decoration pattern or non-reachable combination pattern TC1- It becomes a definitive decorative symbol constituting one of TC4, and the effect operation of “main slip” is executed. Then, in step S640 shown in FIG. 47, by referring to the main slip pattern determination table 256 shown in FIG. 31 selected in step S639, in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern PD1-2 and the fluctuation pattern PD3-2, 6 / The main slip pattern MS1-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 191 (about 3%).

  In the process shown in FIG. 57, first, all symbol variations are started (step ST41). For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. The variable display starts. Thereafter, the left final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST42). For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the left final stop symbol that becomes the confirmed symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L. As an example, the left final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time has a variable display result of “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and a decorative symbol variable display mode of “non-reach” (step S602; Yes). In response to this, in step S603 shown in FIG. 46, the decorative symbol determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 250A shown in FIG. Then, according to the setting in the final stop symbol determination table 250A as shown in FIG. 23A, the left final stop symbol is determined as a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9”. Subsequently, the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST43). The right temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the main slip pattern MS1-1 (step S671 in FIG. 49; No and step S676; Yes), and the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol is a non-reach combination. (Step S677; non-reach), referring to the table of temporary stop TM1-1 shown in FIG. 32 selected in step S678, the decorative design determined in step S680. And the ratio (decision ratio) for determining the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” as the right temporary stop symbol by setting in the temporary stop TM1-1 table as shown in FIG. 32 is a symbol number other than “9”. As compared with any of the determination ratios for determining the arbitrary temporary symbol (any one of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”) as the right temporary stop symbol. In this way, in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-1, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” is displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. Temporary stop can be displayed once. The decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R includes characters indicating “ri” in the character string “big hit”.

  After the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST43, the right symbol change effect is performed in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-1 (step ST44). For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R is changed and displayed while being changed. In this way, in the effect operation of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-1, a change effect that changes the temporarily stopped display decoration pattern is executed in an effect mode different from the effect operation of “sub-slip”. . Thus, after the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R, the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST45). For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the right final stop symbol that becomes the final symbol design is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. As an example, the right final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time has a variable display result of “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and a variable symbol display pattern of “decreased” (step S602; Yes). In response, there may be a decoration symbol determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 250B shown in FIG. 23B in step S604 shown in FIG. Subsequently, the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST46). For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), the middle final stop symbol, which becomes the confirmed ornament symbol, is derived and displayed in the “middle” ornament symbol display portion 5C. As an example, the middle final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time has a variable display result of “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and a decorative symbol variable display mode of “non-reach” (step S602; Yes). In response to this, in step S606 shown in FIG. 46, the decorative symbol determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 250C shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step ST47). If the variable display time has not elapsed in step ST47 (step ST47; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display (step ST48), and return to the process of step ST47. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed in step ST47 (step ST47; Yes), the decorative symbol variable display result is confirmed by displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped (step ST49). For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), the decorative symbols are displayed in a completely stopped manner on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Confirm the variable display result.

  In this way, when the effect of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol from which the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is derived and displayed, all symbol variations are started. After that, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” may be temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. Then, by executing the right symbol change effect in a different effect mode than the “sub-sliding” effect operation, the decorative pattern to be stopped is changed, and the final decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed. The Then, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined and displayed as non-reach combination finalized decorative symbols and confirmation chance items TC1 to TC4. The decorative symbol is configured not to include the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9”.

  FIG. 59 shows a case where the effect of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol from which the definite decorative symbol of the reach lose combination or the jackpot combination is derived and displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advancing production | presentation operation | movement until it complete | finishes after variable display is started. FIG. 60 shows an execution example of effect display in the display area of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress example of the effect operation shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; No) in which the variable display result is “losing”, and a reach determination result (step S246 in FIG. 40) in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. 40), in step S253 shown in FIG. 40, one of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3, fluctuation pattern PA2-4, fluctuation pattern PA3-2, and fluctuation pattern PB3-2 shown in FIG. At the time, the “main slip” effect operation is executed. Further, based on the prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, FIG. In step S253, when any one of the fluctuation pattern PA2-6, fluctuation pattern PA4-2, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB5-2 shown in FIG. The definite decorative symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed, and the effect operation of “main slip” is executed. Further, based on the pre-determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “surprise”, step S253 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern PD2-2 shown in FIG. 9 is determined to be the usage pattern, the definite decorative symbol of the reach-losing combination is derived and displayed, and the “main slip” effect operation is executed.

  In step S640 shown in FIG. 47, the main slip pattern MS1-1 is determined at a different determination ratio according to the variation pattern by referring to the main slip pattern determination table 256 shown in FIG. 31 selected in step S639. Is done. For example, in the case of either the variation pattern PA2-3 or the variation pattern PA2-4, the main slip pattern MS1-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 120/191 (about 63%). On the other hand, in the case of either the variation pattern PA3-2 or the variation pattern PB3-2, the main slip pattern MS1-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 100/191 (about 52%). In the case of the variation pattern PA2-6, the main slip pattern MS1-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 50/191 (about 26%). In the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PA4-2, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB5-2, the main slip pattern MS1-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 3/191 (about 2%). In the case of the fluctuation pattern PD2-2, the main slip pattern MS1-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 6/191 (about 3%).

  In the process shown in FIG. 59, first, all symbol variations are started (step ST61). For example, as shown in FIG. 60A, the decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. The variable display starts. Thereafter, the left final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST62). For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the left final stop symbol that becomes the confirmed symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L. For example, the left final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time has a variable display result of “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and a decorative symbol variable display mode of “reach” (step S602; No). Accordingly, in step S607 illustrated in FIG. 46, for example, the decorative symbol determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 250A illustrated in FIG. Subsequently, the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST63). The right temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the main slip pattern MS1-1 (step S671 in FIG. 49; No, and step S676; Yes), and the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol is a reach lose combination or a jackpot combination. In response to this, (step S677; reach), the decorative design determined in step S680 by referring to the temporary stop TM1-2 table shown in FIG. 32 selected in step S679. And the ratio (decision ratio) for determining the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” as the right temporary stop symbol by setting in the temporary stop TM1-2 table as shown in FIG. 32 is a symbol number other than “9”. As compared with any of the determination ratios for determining the arbitrary temporary symbol (any one of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”) as the right temporary stop symbol. In this way, in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-1, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” is displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. Temporary stop can be displayed once.

  After the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST63, the right symbol change effect is performed in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-1 (step ST64). For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R is changed and displayed while being changed. In this way, after the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R, the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST65). For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the right final stop symbol that becomes the final symbol design is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. As an example, the right final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time has a variable display result of “losing” (step S601; Yes in FIG. 46) and a variable symbol display mode of “decrease” (step S602; No). Accordingly, what is determined is, for example, that determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 46 to be the same decorative pattern as the left final stop symbol, for example. As a result, the same decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. Therefore, for example, by performing an effect display of “reach!” As shown in FIG. 60F, it is notified that the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state. Thereafter, a reach effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed (step ST66).

  When the reach effect executed in step ST66 ends, the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST67). As an example, the middle final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time has a variable display result of “losing” (step S601; Yes in FIG. 46) and a variable symbol display mode of “decrease” (step S602; No). Accordingly, the decorative symbol determined in step S608 shown in FIG. 46 may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step ST68). If the variable display time has not elapsed in step ST68 (step ST68; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display (step ST69) and return to the process of step ST68. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed in step ST68 (step ST68; Yes), the decorative symbol variable display result is confirmed by displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped (step ST70).

  In this way, when the effect of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol from which the definite decorative symbol of the reach lose combination or the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, After the start, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” may be temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. Then, by executing the right symbol change effect in a different effect mode than the “sub-sliding” effect operation, the decorative pattern to be stopped is changed, and the final decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed. The

  FIG. 61 shows a case where the effect of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-2 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol from which the definite decorative symbol of the reach lose combination or the jackpot combination is derived and displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advancing production | presentation operation | movement until it complete | finishes after variable display is started. FIG. 62 shows an execution example of effect display in the display area of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress example of the effect operation shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; No) in which the variable display result is “losing”, and a reach determination result (step S246 in FIG. 40) in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. 40), in step S253 shown in FIG. 40, one of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3, fluctuation pattern PA2-4, fluctuation pattern PA3-2, and fluctuation pattern PB3-2 shown in FIG. At the time, the “main slip” effect operation is executed. Further, based on the prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, FIG. In step S253, when any one of the fluctuation pattern PA2-6, fluctuation pattern PA4-2, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB5-2 shown in FIG. The definite decorative symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed, and the effect operation of “main slip” is executed. Further, based on the pre-determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “surprise”, step S253 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern PD2-2 shown in FIG. 9 is determined to be the usage pattern, the definite decorative symbol of the reach-losing combination is derived and displayed, and the “main slip” effect operation is executed.

  In step S640 shown in FIG. 47, the main slip pattern MS1-2 is determined at a different determination ratio according to the variation pattern by referring to the main slip pattern determination table 256 shown in FIG. 31 selected in step S639. Is done. For example, in the case of any of the variation pattern PA2-3 and the variation pattern PA2-4, the main slip pattern MS1-2 is determined at a determination ratio of 60/191 (about 31%). On the other hand, in the case of either the variation pattern PA3-2 or the variation pattern PB3-2, the main slip pattern MS1-2 is determined at a determination ratio of 70/191 (about 37%). In the case of the variation pattern PA2-6, the main slip pattern MS1-2 is determined at a determination ratio of 50/191 (about 26%). In the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PA4-2, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB5-2, the main slip pattern MS1-2 is determined at a determination ratio of 8/191 (about 4%). In the case of the variation pattern PD2-2, the main slip pattern MS1-2 is determined at a determination ratio of 15/191 (about 8%). In this embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-4 is determined to be a use pattern based on a prior determination result in which the variable display result is “losing” or a reach determination result in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach”. In such a case, the main slip pattern MS1-2 is not determined by the setting of the main slip pattern determination table 256 shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main slip pattern MS1-2 can be determined even when the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. You may be able to do it. For example, in the main slip pattern determination table 256, allocation is performed so that a part of the random value SR5 for determining the main slip pattern is also associated with the main slip pattern MS1-2 in accordance with the variation pattern PA1-4. May be. When the variation pattern PA1-4 is determined to be the main slip pattern MS1-2, the "main slip" effect operation corresponding to the main slip pattern MS1-2 is executed, but the decorative pattern is reach-displayed. The fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination are derived and displayed without being derived and displayed in the state.

  In the process shown in FIG. 61, first, all symbol variations are started (step ST81). For example, as shown in FIG. 62A, the decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. The variable display starts. Thereafter, the left temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST82). The left temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the main slip pattern MS1-2 (step S671 in FIG. 49; No and step S676; No and step S681; Yes), step S682. 33 is a decorative design determined in step S683 by referring to the table of temporary stop TM1-3 shown in FIG. Then, the decorative symbols other than the symbol numbers “7” and “9” are determined as the left temporary stop symbols by the setting in the table of the temporary stops TM1-3 as shown in FIG. Thus, in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-2, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the left temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5R. be able to.

  After the left temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST82, the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST83). The right temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the main slip pattern MS1-2 (step S671 in FIG. 49; No and step S676; No and step S681; Yes), step S684. 33 is a decorative design determined in step S685 by referring to the table of temporary stop TM1-4 shown in FIG. And the ratio (decision ratio) for determining the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” as the right temporary stop symbol by setting in the temporary stop TM1-4 table as shown in FIG. 33 is a symbol number other than “9”. As compared with any of the determination ratios for determining the arbitrary temporary symbol (any one of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”) as the right temporary stop symbol. Thus, in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-2, for example, as shown in FIG. Temporary stop can be displayed once.

  After the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST83, the left / right symbol change effect is performed in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-2 (step ST84). For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R are changed and displayed while being changed. Thus, after the effect display for changing the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R is performed, the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol are derived and displayed (steps). ST85). For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol, which are final decorative symbols, are temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. . As an example, the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time have a variable display result of “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and a variable symbol display mode of “decrease” (step S602). ; No) as long as it is determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 46 to be the same decorative design. As a result, the same decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. Therefore, for example, by performing an effect display of “reach!” As shown in FIG. 62 (F), it is notified that the decorative symbol has been derived and displayed in the reach display state. Thereafter, a reach effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed (step ST86).

  When the reach effect executed in step ST86 ends, the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST87). As an example, the middle final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time has a variable display result of “losing” (step S601; Yes in FIG. 46) and a variable symbol display mode of “decrease” (step S602; No). Accordingly, the decorative symbol determined in step S608 shown in FIG. 46 may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step ST88). If the variable display time has not elapsed in step ST88 (step ST88; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display (step ST89) and return to the process of step ST88. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed in step ST88 (step ST88; Yes), the decorative symbol variable display result is confirmed by displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped (step ST90).

  In this way, when the effect of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-2 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol from which the definite decorative symbol of the reach lose combination or the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, After the start, a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9” is temporarily displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, and then the symbol number “5” is displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R. The decorative pattern “9” may be temporarily stopped. Then, the decoration that is stopped and displayed by executing the change effect of the left symbol and the right symbol in an effect mode different from the effect operation of “sub-slip” and the effect operation of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-1. The symbols are changed, and the final decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol are derived and displayed in the reach display state.

  FIG. 63 shows a case where the effect of “main sliding” by the main sliding pattern MS1-3 is executed during the variable display of the decorative design in which the definite decorative design of the reach lose combination and the jackpot combination is derived and displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advancing production | presentation operation | movement until it complete | finishes after variable display is started. FIG. 64 shows an execution example of effect display in the display area of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress example of the effect operation shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; No) in which the variable display result is “losing”, and a reach determination result (step S246 in FIG. 40) in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. 40), in step S253 shown in FIG. 40, one of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3, fluctuation pattern PA2-4, fluctuation pattern PA3-2, and fluctuation pattern PB3-2 shown in FIG. At the time, the “main slip” effect operation is executed. Further, based on the prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, FIG. In step S253, when any one of the fluctuation pattern PA2-6, fluctuation pattern PA4-2, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB5-2 shown in FIG. The definite decorative symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed, and the effect operation of “main slip” is executed. Further, based on the pre-determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “surprise”, step S253 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern PD2-2 shown in FIG. 9 is determined to be the usage pattern, the definite decorative symbol of the reach-losing combination is derived and displayed, and the “main slip” effect operation is executed.

  In step S640 shown in FIG. 47, the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined at a different determination ratio according to the variation pattern by referring to the main slip pattern determination table 256 shown in FIG. 31 selected in step S639. Is done. For example, in the case of any of the variation pattern PA2-3 and the variation pattern PA2-4, the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined at a determination ratio of 10/191 (about 5%). On the other hand, in the case of either the variation pattern PA3-2 or the variation pattern PB3-2, the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined at a determination ratio of 15/191 (about 8%). In the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-6, the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined at a determination ratio of 50/191 (about 26%). In the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PA4-2, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB5-2, the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined at a determination ratio of 60/191 (about 31%). In the case of the variation pattern PD2-2, the main slip pattern MS1-3 is determined at a determination ratio of 70/191 (about 37%). In this embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-4 is determined to be a use pattern based on a prior determination result in which the variable display result is “losing” or a reach determination result in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach”. In this case, the main slip pattern MS1-3 is not determined by the setting of the main slip pattern determination table 256 shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main slip pattern MS1-3 can be determined even when the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach”. You may be able to do it. For example, in the main slip pattern determination table 256, allocation is performed so that a part of the random value SR5 for determining the main slip pattern is also associated with the main slip pattern MS1-3 according to the variation pattern PA1-4. May be. When the variation pattern PA1-4 is determined to be the main slip pattern MS1-3, the effect of "main slip" corresponding to the main slip pattern MS1-3 is executed, but the decorative symbol is displayed as a reach. The fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination are derived and displayed without being derived and displayed in the state.

  In the process shown in FIG. 63, first, all symbol variations are started (step ST101). For example, as shown in FIG. 64A, the decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. The variable display starts. Thereafter, the left temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST102). The left temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the main slip pattern MS1-3 (step S671 in FIG. 49; No and step S676; No and step S681; Yes), step S682. 33 is a decorative design determined in step S683 by referring to the table of temporary stop TM1-3 shown in FIG. Then, the decorative symbols other than the symbol numbers “7” and “9” are determined as the left temporary stop symbols by the setting in the table of the temporary stops TM1-3 as shown in FIG. In this way, in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-3, for example, as shown in FIG. 64B, the left temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L. be able to.

  After the left temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST102, the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST103). The right temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the main slip pattern MS1-3 (step S671 in FIG. 49; No and step S676; No and step S681; Yes), step S684. 33 is a decorative design determined in step S685 by referring to the table of temporary stop TM1-4 shown in FIG. And the ratio (decision ratio) for determining the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” as the right temporary stop symbol by setting in the temporary stop TM1-4 table as shown in FIG. 33 is a symbol number other than “9”. As compared with any of the determination ratios for determining the arbitrary temporary symbol (any one of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”) as the right temporary stop symbol. Thus, in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-3, for example, as shown in FIG. Temporary stop can be displayed once.

  After the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST103, the intermediate temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST104). Depending on the fact that the intermediate temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the main slip pattern MS1-3 (step S671 in FIG. 49; No and step S676; No and step S681; Yes and step S686; Yes), the decorative symbol determined in step S689 by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 250C shown in FIG. 23C selected in step S688. Then, according to the setting in the final stop symbol determination table 250C as shown in FIG. 23C, among the symbols other than the symbol number “9”, the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbol is a predetermined non-reach combination. The intermediate temporary stop symbol is determined so as not to become. Thus, in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-3, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the intermediate temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5R. be able to.

  After the intermediate temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST104, all symbols are changed in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS1-3 (step ST105). For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are changed while being played. Vary by displaying. Thus, after the effect display for changing the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is performed, the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol are displayed. A symbol is derived and displayed (step ST106). For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol, which are the final decorative symbols, are temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. . As an example, the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time have a variable display result of “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and a variable symbol display mode of “decrease” (step S602). ; No) as long as it is determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 46 to be the same decorative design. As a result, the same decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. Therefore, for example, by performing an effect display of “reach!” As shown in FIG. 64G, it is notified that the decorative symbol has been derived and displayed in the reach display state. Thereafter, a reach effect according to the variation pattern is executed (step ST107).

  When the reach effect executed in step ST107 ends, the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST108). As an example, the middle final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time has a variable display result of “losing” (step S601; Yes in FIG. 46) and a variable symbol display mode of “decrease” (step S602; No). Accordingly, the decorative symbol determined in step S608 shown in FIG. 46 may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step ST109). If the variable display time has not elapsed in step ST109 (step ST109; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display (step ST110) and return to the process of step ST109. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed in step ST109 (step ST109; Yes), the decorative symbol variable display result is confirmed by displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped (step ST111).

  In this way, when the effect of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-3 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol from which the definite decorative symbol of the reach lose combination or the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, After the start, a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9” is temporarily displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, and then the symbol number “5” is displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R. The decorative pattern “9” may be temporarily stopped. Further, when the effect of performing “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-3 is executed, the decorative symbols other than the symbol number “9” are temporarily displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display section 5C. Is done. Then, by executing the effect of changing all symbols in an effect mode different from the effect operation of “sub-slip” and the effect of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS1-1 or the main slip pattern MS1-2, The displayed decorative symbols are changed, and the final decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol are derived and displayed in the reach display state.

  FIG. 65 shows a case where the decorative action of the “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS2-1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern from which the definite decorative pattern of the reach lose combination or the big hit combination is derived and displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advancing of production | presentation operation | movement until it complete | finishes after variable display is started. FIG. 66 shows an execution example of the effect display in the display area of the image display device 5 according to the progress example of the effect operation shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; No) in which the variable display result is “losing”, and a reach determination result (step S246 in FIG. 40) in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. 40), in step S253 shown in FIG. 40, one of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3, fluctuation pattern PA2-4, fluctuation pattern PA3-2, and fluctuation pattern PB3-2 shown in FIG. At the time, the “main slip” effect operation is executed. Further, based on the prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, FIG. In step S253, when any one of the fluctuation pattern PA2-6, fluctuation pattern PA4-2, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB5-2 shown in FIG. The definite decorative symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed, and the effect operation of “main slip” is executed. Further, based on the pre-determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “surprise”, step S253 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern PD2-2 shown in FIG. 9 is determined to be the usage pattern, the definite decorative symbol of the reach-losing combination is derived and displayed, and the “main slip” effect operation is executed.

  In step S640 shown in FIG. 47, the main slip pattern MS2-1 is determined at a different determination ratio according to the variation pattern by referring to the main slip pattern determination table 256 shown in FIG. 31 selected in step S639. Is done. For example, in the case of any one of the variation pattern PA2-3 and the variation pattern PA2-4, the main slip pattern MS2-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 1/191 (about 0.5%). On the other hand, in the case of either the variation pattern PA3-2 or the variation pattern PB3-2, the main slip pattern MS2-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 6/191 (about 3%). In the case of the variation pattern PA2-6, the main slip pattern MS2-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 11/191 (about 6%). In the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PA4-2, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB5-2, the main slip pattern MS2-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 120/191 (about 63%). In the case of the variation pattern PD2-2, the main slip pattern MS2-1 is determined at a determination ratio of 100/191 (about 52%).

  In the process shown in FIG. 65, first, all symbol variations are started (step ST121). For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. The variable display starts. Thereafter, the left temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST122). The left temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the main slip pattern MS2-1 (step S671 in FIG. 49; No and step S676; No and step S681; No), step S690. FIG. 33 shows the decorative design determined in step S691 by referring to the table of temporary stop TM2-1 shown in FIG. Then, the decorative symbols other than the symbol numbers “7” and “9” are determined as the left temporary stop symbols by the setting in the temporary stop TM2-1 table as shown in FIG. Thus, in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS2-1, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the left temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L. be able to.

  After the left temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST122, the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST123). The right temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the main slip pattern MS2-1 (step S671; No and step S676; No and step S681; No in FIG. 49), step S692. 33 is a decorative design determined in step S693 by referring to the table of temporary stop TM2-2 shown in FIG. Then, by setting in the table of temporary stop TM2-2 as shown in FIG. 33, a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9” is determined as the right temporary stop symbol. Thus, in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS2-1, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the right temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R. be able to.

  After the right temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST123, the intermediate temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST124). The intermediate temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is the main slip pattern MS2-1 (step S671 in FIG. 49; No and step S676; No and step S681; No), step S694. This is a decorative symbol whose symbol number is determined as “9”. The decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C is configured to include characters indicating “to” in the character string “big hit”. Thus, in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS2-1, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9” in the “medium” decorative symbol display portion 5R. Can be temporarily displayed.

  After the middle temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST124, a change effect for all symbols is performed in the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS2-1 (step ST125). For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), an effect image showing the character CH1 constituting the decorative symbol pops out from the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display section 5C. Effect display is performed such that the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display portion 5R is pulled. Note that the decorative symbol that the effect image showing the character CH1 pops out and is pulled is not limited to the decorative symbol temporarily displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R, but on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L. It may be a decorative design that is temporarily displayed. Then, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are scroll-displayed again as shown in FIG. 66 (F), for example. Vary by. It should be noted that the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS2-1 is not limited to one in which all symbols are changed, for example, any of the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. On the other hand, the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed may be changed by scrolling again. As an example, when the decorative symbol that the effect image showing the character CH1 pops out and pulls is the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R, the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R is displayed. Then, it is only necessary to change the decorative symbols once temporarily displayed. As another example, in a case where the decorative symbol that the effect image showing character CH1 pops out and pulls is the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L, the “left” decorative symbol display portion It is only necessary to change again only the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at 5L. As shown in FIG. 66 (F), after the effect display that changes the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is performed, The final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol are derived and displayed (step ST126). For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol that are finalized decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. . As an example, the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time have a variable display result of “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and a variable symbol display mode of “decrease” (step S602). ; No) as long as it is determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 46 to be the same decorative design. As a result, the same decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. Therefore, for example, by performing an effect display of “Leach!” As shown in FIG. 66 (H), it is notified that the decorative symbol has been derived and displayed in the reach display state. Thereafter, a reach effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed (step ST127).

  When the reach effect executed in step ST127 ends, the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST128). As an example, the middle final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time has a variable display result of “losing” (step S601; Yes in FIG. 46) and a variable symbol display mode of “decrease” (step S602; No). Accordingly, the decorative symbol determined in step S608 shown in FIG. 46 may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step ST129). If the variable display time has not elapsed in step ST129 (step ST129; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display (step ST130), and return to the process of step ST129. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed in step ST129 (step ST129; Yes), the decorative symbol variable display result is confirmed by displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped (step ST131).

  In this way, when the effect of “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS2-1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol from which the definite decorative symbol of the reach-losing combination or the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, After the start, a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9” is temporarily displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, and then the symbol number “5” is displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R. Decorative symbols other than “9” are temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, when the effect of performing “main slip” by the main slip pattern MS2-1 is executed, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is temporarily displayed temporarily on the “middle” decorative symbol display section 5C. The Then, for example, a “sub-slip” effect operation such as an effect display in which an effect image showing the character CH1 pops out and pulls a temporary stop-displayed decoration pattern, or the main slip pattern MS1-1 to main slip pattern MS1-3. By executing the change effect of all symbols in a different display mode from the “main slip” effect operation by either, the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is changed to be confirmed as the left final stop symbol and the right final stop symbol The decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state.

  FIG. 67 shows an example of the progress of the rendering operation from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols when the variation pattern PC3-1, the variation pattern PC4-1, or the variation pattern PC5-1 is determined. It is a flowchart which shows. FIG. 68 shows an execution example of the effect display in the display area of the image display device 5 according to the progress example of the effect operation shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; No) in which the variable display result is “losing”, and a reach determination result (step S246 in FIG. 40) in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. When the variation pattern PC3-1 shown in FIG. 8 is determined to be the usage pattern in step S253 shown in FIG. 40, “Left” and “Medium” are used in a special derivation order different from the normal derivation order. The decorative symbols having the symbol number “9” are derived and displayed side by side in the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5C, so that the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state (left middle reach). Further, based on the prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, FIG. In step S253 shown in FIG. 9, even when the variation pattern PC4-1 or variation pattern PC5-1 shown in FIG. 9 is determined, “left” and “middle” are displayed in a special derivation order different from the normal derivation order. In the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5C, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is derived and displayed side by side, so that the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state (left middle reach). In the case where the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is included in the probability variation symbol, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probability variation”, in step S253 shown in FIG. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, it can be decided as either the fluctuation pattern PC4-1 or the fluctuation pattern PC5-1. You don't have to.

  When the variation pattern is determined in step S253 shown in FIG. 40, for example, the random value MR5 in the loss variation pattern determination table 208B shown in FIG. 18B or the big hit variation pattern determination table 209A shown in FIG. The probability that the variable display result is “big hit” when the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the special derivation order due to setting (allocation), etc., is the probability that the variable display result is “ What is necessary is just to make it high compared with the probability of becoming "big hit". In addition, the variable display result is “big hit” when the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in a special derivation order, compared to the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” when the “main slip” effect operation is executed. What is necessary is just to make the probability which becomes higher. Here, when the effect operation of “main sliding” is executed, the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C (in the case of the main sliding pattern MS2-1) or the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R (main). In the case of any one of the sliding patterns MS1-1 to main sliding patterns MS1-3), the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” may be derived and displayed as a temporary stop symbol. On the other hand, when the pattern is determined to be any one of the variation pattern PC3-1, the variation pattern PC4-1, and the variation pattern PC5-1, in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5C, The decorative symbols with the symbol number “9” are displayed and displayed side by side. That is, the decorative symbol display in which the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” included in the special identification information is derived and displayed among the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. The variation pattern and the stop symbol may be determined so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of parts increases.

  In the process shown in FIG. 67, first, all symbol variations are started (step ST141). Thereafter, a changing effect such as a notice effect or a “pseudo-run once” effect operation is executed (step ST142). Here, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the variation pattern PC 3-1, the variation pattern PC 4-1, and the variation pattern PC 5-1 are all variation patterns that can execute a “pseudo-continuous once” effect. It has become. Therefore, in response to the fact that the fluctuation pattern can execute “pseudo continuous once” (step S631 in FIG. 47; Yes), after selecting the pseudo continuous once execution determination table 253 shown in FIG. In step S632), it is determined whether or not “there is pseudo-continuity” (step S633). At this time, if it is determined that “there is a quasi-ream” (step S633; Yes), the “pseudo-ream once” is determined using the temporary stop symbol determined in the quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination process (step S635). The production operation is executed. Also, in step S642 shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not to perform the “sub-notice” effect operation, and if so, one of a plurality of types of sub-notice patterns is selected as the use pattern. To do. As a result, during the variable display of the decorative symbols by any one of the variation pattern PC3-1, the variation pattern PC4-1, and the variation pattern PC5-1, it is possible to execute the effect operation of “sub notice”. When it is determined that “no pseudo-continuation” is made (step S633 in FIG. 47; No), and when it is determined that the “sub-notice” effect operation is not executed, the changing effect in step ST142 is executed. It does not have to be done.

  Following the process of step ST142, the left final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST143). Even when the left final stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST143, the changing effect (eg, the “sub-notice” effect operation, etc.) in step ST142 may be continuously executed. The left final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is when the variable display result is “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” (step S602; No). The symbol number determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 46 according to the variation pattern PC3-1 may be a decorative symbol with “9”. Alternatively, the left last stop symbol has a variable display result of “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and a big hit type “normal” or “probability change” (step S609; No) (symbol number “9”). (If the jackpot type is “probability variation” when the probability variation design is included in the probability variation design), depending on whether it is one of the variation pattern PC4-1 or variation pattern PC5-1 (step S613; Yes) 46 may be a decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” determined in step S614 shown in FIG.

  After the left final stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST143, the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST144). Until the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST144, the changing effect (eg, the “sub-notice” effect operation) in step ST142 may be continuously executed. The middle final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is when the variable display result is “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” (step S602; No). The symbol number determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 46 according to the variation pattern PC3-1 may be a decorative symbol with “9”. Alternatively, the middle final stop symbol has a variable display result of “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and a big hit type “normal” or “probable change” (step S609; No) (symbol number “9”). (If the jackpot type is “probability variation” when the probability variation design is included in the probability variation design), depending on whether it is one of the variation pattern PC4-1 or variation pattern PC5-1 (step S613; Yes) 46 may be a decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” determined in step S614 shown in FIG. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the decorative symbols with the symbol number “9” are temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5C. The symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state.

  When the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST144, the reach display state in which the symbol number “9” is arranged in the “left” and “middle” ornament symbol display portions 5L and 5C is displayed. As an effect operation peculiar to the left, for example, a left / middle symbol fusion effect in which the ornament symbols derived and displayed by the “left” and “middle” ornament symbol display units 5L and 5C are merged (step ST145). Here, in the display control pattern included in the symbol variation control pattern set according to the variation pattern PC3-1, the variation pattern PC4-1, or the variation pattern PC5-1, the left middle symbol fusion effect is the variation pattern PC3-1. The execution content of the rendering operation may be determined in advance by display control data or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” derived and displayed by the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L is the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C indicated by the arrow AR1. Move in the direction toward. Further, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” derived and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C moves in the direction toward the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L indicated by the arrow AR2. The portion where the left symbol and the middle symbol overlap is displayed in an intermediate color between the two symbols, for example, so that an effect display is performed in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are synthesized and fused. Note that the effect display in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are merged is not limited to the one that moves so that both symbols overlap, and for example, the symbols may be merged so that both symbols are enlarged and overlapped. In addition, the effect display in which a plurality of symbols are merged is not limited to those in which the symbols are merged so as to overlap each other, and the symbols are merged so that a plurality of symbols are combined by being displayed adjacent to each other. It may be a thing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), there is a decorative symbol derived and displayed by the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L and a decorative symbol derived and displayed by the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C. After the images are displayed so as to be completely overlapped with each other, the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image is started (step ST146). At this time, for example, based on the display control data read from the display control pattern included in the symbol variation control pattern, it is determined to start the reproduction of the moving image (step S723 in FIG. 52; Yes), and the reproduction display of the moving image is started. Is set to do this (step S724). When the decoding timing is reached (step S725; Yes), settings for decoding and reproducing and displaying the moving image are performed (step S726). Then, when the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image is ended, it is determined that the reproduction of the moving image is ended based on the display control data read from the display control pattern included in the symbol variation control pattern, for example (step S727; Yes). ), A setting for ending the reproduction display of the moving image is performed (step S728). As a moving image to be reproduced and displayed in this way, for example, the display image included in the decorative pattern with the symbol number “9” derived and displayed side by side in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5C is shown. It is sufficient that contents related to the combination of characters to be prepared are prepared in advance. As an example, it is assumed that the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol having the symbol number “9” each include a portion of a display image (a hatched portion shown in FIG. 2) showing different characters. For example, among the decorative symbols with the symbol number “9”, the left symbol includes a display image indicating the character A, the middle symbol includes an effect image indicating the character B, and the right symbol includes an effect image indicating the character C. In this case, a combination of decorative symbols with the symbol number “9” derived and displayed in a reach display state alongside a part of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” Corresponding to the above, any one of a plurality of types of moving images may be reproduced and displayed. For example, the character included in the left symbol is displayed after reaching the reach display state by deriving and displaying the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” side by side on the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5C. As a reach effect in which A and the character B included in the middle symbol appear, the reproduction and display of the first moving image is performed. On the other hand, for example, after the reach display state is obtained by displaying and displaying the decorative symbols with the symbol number “9” side by side on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, As a reach effect in which the character A included in the symbol and the character C included in the right symbol appear, reproduction and display of a second moving image different from the first moving image is performed.

  When the reach effect by playing and displaying the moving image is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are reduced. The display may be performed in a part of the display area of the image display device 5 so that it can be recognized that the variable display of the decorative symbols is continued. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), after the two decorative symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other, until the combined decorative symbols reach the entire display area of the image display device 5, or the image display A display area (window) in which a moving image is reproduced and displayed by the display part of the enlarged decorative pattern is displayed so as to be enlarged to a predetermined size in a part of the display area of the device 5. You may make it form.

  When the reach effect executed in step ST146 ends, the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST147). The right final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is when the variable display result is “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” (step S602; No). In accordance with the variation pattern PC 3-1, it is only necessary that the symbol number determined in step S 607 shown in FIG. Alternatively, the right final stop symbol has a variable display result of “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and a big hit type “normal” or “probability change” (step S609; No) (symbol number “9”). (If the jackpot type is “probability variation” when the probability variation design is included in the probability variation design), depending on whether it is one of the variation pattern PC4-1 or variation pattern PC5-1 (step S613; Yes) 46 may be a decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” determined in step S614 shown in FIG. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step ST148). If the variable display time has not elapsed in step ST148 (step ST148; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is displayed (step ST149), and the process returns to step ST148. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed in step ST148 (step ST148; Yes), the decorative symbol variable display result is confirmed by displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped (step ST150).

  Thus, in the variable display of decorative symbols by the variable pattern PC 3-1, the variable pattern PC 4-1, and the variable pattern PC 5-1, the symbols are first displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5 L after all symbol variations are started. Following the display of the decorative symbol with the number “9”, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is derived and displayed on the decorative symbol display section 5C of “medium”. At this time, the decorative symbols included in the special identification information are derived and displayed side by side on the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5C, so that the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state. become. Then, after the decorative design included in the special identification information is derived and displayed in the reach display state, for example, an effect display is performed such that the decorative design included in the special identification information derived and displayed in the reach display state is fused, Reach production is performed by playing and displaying moving images. In this way, when the decorative symbol included in the special identification information is derived and displayed in the reach display state, it enhances the directing effect by executing a specific directing operation such as fusion of decorative symbols or playback display of moving images, The interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 69 shows an example of the progress of the rendering operation from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols when the variation pattern PC3-2, variation pattern PC4-2, or variation pattern PC5-2 is determined. It is a flowchart which shows. FIG. 70 shows an execution example of the effect display in the display area of the image display device 5 according to the progress example of the effect operation shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; No) in which the variable display result is “losing”, and a reach determination result (step S246 in FIG. 40) in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. When the variation pattern PC3-2 shown in FIG. 8 is determined to be the use pattern in step S253 shown in FIG. 40, the “left” and “right” are set in a special derivation order different from the normal derivation order. The decorative symbols having the symbol number “9” are derived and displayed side by side on the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R of “”, and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state (left and right reach). Further, based on the prior determination result (step S226 in FIG. 39; Yes) in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type determination result (step S229) in which the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, FIG. In step S253 shown in FIG. 9, even when the variation pattern PC4-2 or variation pattern PC5-2 shown in FIG. 9 is determined, “left” and “right” are used in the special derivation order different from the normal derivation order. The decorative symbols having the symbol number “9” are derived and displayed side by side in the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5C, so that the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state (left and right reach). In the case where the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is included in the probability variation symbol, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probability variation”, in step S253 shown in FIG. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, it can be decided as either the fluctuation pattern PC4-2 or the fluctuation pattern PC5-2. You don't have to.

  In the process shown in FIG. 69, first, all symbol variations are started (step ST161). Thereafter, a changing effect such as a notice effect or a “pseudo-run once” effect operation is executed (step ST162). Here, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the variation pattern PC 3-2, the variation pattern PC 4-2, and the variation pattern PC 5-2 are all variation patterns that can execute a “pseudo-continuous once” effect operation. It has become. Therefore, in response to the fact that the fluctuation pattern can execute “pseudo continuous once” (step S631 in FIG. 47; Yes), after selecting the pseudo continuous once execution determination table 253 shown in FIG. In step S632), it is determined whether or not “there is pseudo-continuity” (step S633). At this time, if it is determined that “there is a quasi-ream” (step S633; Yes), the “pseudo-ream once” is determined using the temporary stop symbol determined in the quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination process (step S635). The production operation is executed. Also, in step S642 shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not to perform the “sub-notice” effect operation, and if so, one of a plurality of types of sub-notice patterns is selected as the use pattern. To do. As a result, during the variable display of the decorative symbol by any one of the fluctuation pattern PC3-2, the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2, the effect operation of “sub notice” can be executed. When it is determined that “no pseudo-continuation” is made (step S633 in FIG. 47; No), and it is determined that the “sub-notice” effect operation is not executed, the changing effect is not executed. Also good.

  Following the process in step ST162, the left final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST163). Even when the left final stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST163, the changing effect (eg, the “sub-notice” effect operation, etc.) in step ST162 may be continuously executed. The left final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is when the variable display result is “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” (step S602; No). In accordance with the variation pattern PC3-2, it is sufficient that the symbol number determined in step S607 shown in FIG. Alternatively, the left last stop symbol has a variable display result of “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and a big hit type “normal” or “probability change” (step S609; No) (symbol number “9”). (If the jackpot type is “probable variation”), the decorative pattern is included in the probability variation symbol), depending on whether the variation pattern PC4-2 or variation pattern PC5-2 is selected (step S613; Yes). 46 may be a decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” determined in step S614 shown in FIG.

  After the left final stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST163, the intermediate temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST164). Even when the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST164, the changing effect (eg, the “sub-notice” effect operation) in step ST162 may be continuously executed. The intermediate temporary stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is one of the variation pattern PC3-2, the variation pattern PC4-2, and the variation pattern PC5-2 (step S643 in FIG. 47; Yes), FIG. The symbol number determined in step S644 shown in FIG. 5 may be a decorative symbol other than “9”.

  After the middle temporary stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST164, a changing effect such as a “sub slip” effect operation may be executed (step ST165). Here, in the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PC3-1, the fluctuation pattern PC4-1, and the fluctuation pattern PC5-1, when the decoration symbol is derived and displayed on the “medium” decoration symbol display portion 5C, Since the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the reach effect is started. Therefore, in the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PC3-1, the fluctuation pattern PC4-1, and the fluctuation pattern PC5-1, the slip for temporarily changing the decoration symbol temporarily displayed on the “right” decoration symbol display unit 5R. It is not possible to execute a “sub-slip” performance operation that includes a performance. In the sub slip execution determination table 255 shown in FIG. 30, if any of the variation pattern PC 3-1, the variation pattern PC 4-1, and the variation pattern PC 5-1, All of the random values SR4 for sub-slip execution determination are allocated. On the other hand, in the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PC3-2, the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2, when the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display portion 5C. The decorative design is not yet derived and displayed in the reach display state, and the reach effect is not started. Therefore, if the pattern is any one of the fluctuation pattern PC3-2, the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2, refer to the sub slip execution determination table 255 shown in FIG. 30 selected in step S637 shown in FIG. By doing so, it can be determined that “sub slip is present” in step S638 (“variation pattern” in FIG. 30 corresponds to “other than the above”). If it is determined in step S638 that “sub-slip is present” (step S638; Yes), the “sub-slip” is determined using the temporary stop symbol determined in the pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination process (step S641). The production operation is executed. If it is determined that “no sub-slip” (step S638; No), the changing effect in step ST165 may not be executed.

  Following the process of step ST165, the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST166). Until the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST166, the changing effect (eg, the “sub-notice” effect operation) in step ST162 may be continuously executed. The right final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is when the variable display result is “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” (step S602; No). In accordance with the variation pattern PC3-2, it is sufficient that the symbol number determined in step S607 shown in FIG. Alternatively, the right final stop symbol has a variable display result of “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and a big hit type “normal” or “probability change” (step S609; No) (symbol number “9”). (If the jackpot type is “probable variation”), the decorative pattern is included in the probability variation symbol), depending on whether the variation pattern PC4-2 or variation pattern PC5-2 is selected (step S613; Yes). 46 may be a decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” determined in step S614 shown in FIG. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the decorative symbols with the symbol number “9” are temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. The symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state.

  When the right final stop symbol is derived and displayed in step ST166, the reach display state in which the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is arranged in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R As an effect operation peculiar to the left and right, for example, a left and right symbol fusion effect is performed such that the ornament symbols derived and displayed in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display units 5L and 5R are fused (step ST167). Here, in the display control pattern included in the symbol variation control pattern set in accordance with the variation pattern PC3-2, variation pattern PC4-2, variation pattern PC5-2, The execution content of the rendering operation may be determined in advance by display control data or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), after the display of the decorative symbol in the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C is erased, the symbol number derived and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L is “9”. ”Moves in the direction toward the“ middle ”decorative symbol display portion 5C indicated by the arrow AR3. Further, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” derived and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R moves in the direction toward the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C indicated by the arrow AR4. For example, in the display position corresponding to the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C, the portion where the left symbol and the right symbol overlap is displayed in an intermediate color of both symbols, so that the left symbol and the right symbol are combined. Production display is performed. Note that the effect display in which the left symbol and the right symbol are merged is not limited to a display that moves so that both symbols overlap, and for example, both symbols may be enlarged and merged so as to overlap. In addition, the effect display in which a plurality of symbols are merged is not limited to those in which the symbols are merged so as to overlap each other, and the symbols are merged so that a plurality of symbols are combined by being displayed adjacent to each other. It may be a thing.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 70C, there is a decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L and a decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R. After the images are displayed so as to be completely overlapped with each other, the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image is started (step ST168). The moving image reproduced and displayed at this time is, for example, a display image included in the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” derived and displayed side by side on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. It is only necessary to prepare in advance a content related to the combination of characters shown.

  When the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 70D, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are reduced. The display may be performed in a part of the display area of the image display device 5 so that it can be recognized that the variable display of the decorative symbols is continued. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 70C, after the two decorative symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other, until the combined decorative symbols reach the entire display area of the image display device 5, or the image display is performed. A display area (window) in which a moving image is reproduced and displayed by the display part of the enlarged decorative pattern is displayed so as to be enlarged to a predetermined size in a part of the display area of the device 5. You may make it form.

  When the reach effect executed in step ST168 ends, the middle final stop symbol is derived and displayed (step ST169). The middle final stop symbol derived and displayed at this time is when the variable display result is “losing” (step S601 in FIG. 46; Yes) and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” (step S602; No). In accordance with the variation pattern PC3-2, it is sufficient that the symbol number determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 46 is a decorative symbol (−1 frame loss) with “8”. Alternatively, the middle final stop symbol has a variable display result of “big hit” (step S601 in FIG. 46; No) and a big hit type “normal” or “probable change” (step S609; No) (symbol number “9”). (If the jackpot type is “probable variation”), the decorative pattern is included in the probability variation symbol), depending on whether the variation pattern PC4-2 or variation pattern PC5-2 is selected (step S613; Yes). 46 may be a decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” determined in step S614 shown in FIG. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step ST170). If the variable display time has not elapsed in step ST170 (step ST170; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display (step ST171) and return to the process of step ST170. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed in step ST170 (step ST170; Yes), the decorative symbol variable display result is confirmed by displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped (step ST172).

  Thus, in the variable display of decorative symbols by the variable pattern PC 3-2, the variable pattern PC 4-2, and the variable pattern PC 5-2, the symbols are first displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5 L after all symbol variations have started. After the decorative symbol with the number “9” is derived and displayed, a decorative symbol with a symbol number other than “9” is derived and displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display section 5C. Thereafter, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is derived and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. At this time, the decorative symbols included in the special identification information are derived and displayed side by side on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, so that the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state. become. Then, after the decorative design included in the special identification information is derived and displayed in the reach display state, for example, an effect display is performed such that the decorative design included in the special identification information derived and displayed in the reach display state is fused, Reach production is performed by playing and displaying moving images. In this way, when the decorative symbol included in the special identification information is derived and displayed in the reach display state, it enhances the directing effect by executing a specific directing operation such as fusion of decorative symbols or playback display of moving images, The interest of the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Among them, as a decorative symbol whose symbol number included in the special identification information is “9”, the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C and 5R are displayed side by side. By doing so, for example, one type of decorative pattern formed including characters constituting different identification information is included so as to have a specific meaning such as “big hit”. In the variable display of the decorative pattern by any one of the variation pattern PC3-1 and the variation pattern PC3-2, the variation pattern PC4-1 and the variation pattern PC4-2, the variation pattern PC5-1 and the variation pattern PC5-2, After the change starts, first, the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L derives and displays the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” included in the special identification information, and then the “middle” decorative symbol display unit. After the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in 5C, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a special derivation order, in which the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R derives and displays the decorative symbols. On the other hand, the variation of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern different from the variation pattern PC3-1 and the variation pattern PC3-2, the variation pattern PC4-1 and the variation pattern PC4-2, the variation pattern PC5-1 and the variation pattern PC5-2. In the display, after all the symbols change is started, the decorative symbol display unit 5L of “left” first displays and displays a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9” included in the normal identification information. The decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the normal derivation order, in which the decorative symbols are derived and displayed by the decorative symbol display portion 5R of “” and then the decorative symbols are derived and displayed by the decorative symbol display portion 5C of “medium”. This makes it possible to derive and display decorative symbols in multiple types of derivation orders, such as normal derivation order and special derivation order, and enhance the effect when rendering and displaying decorative symbols included in special identification information. The interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the decorative symbols included in the special identification information are displayed side by side, it has a specific meaning, and the variable display result becomes “big hit”, so that the variable display result becomes “big hit”. Can be easily recognized, and the expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” can be enhanced.

  When the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S226 shown in FIG. 39, the big hit flag is set to the on state in step S227 based on the pre-determination result in which the variable display result is “big hit”. If the big hit flag is ON in step S241 shown in FIG. 40, any of the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 205A to 205C, 206A to 206C, and 207A to 207C is selected as a use table in step S242. . If the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S226 shown in FIG. 39, the big hit flag is off in step S241 shown in FIG. 40, and the reach determination table selected in step S243. With reference to any one of 202A to 202C, it is determined in step S246 whether or not the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state. If the determination result in step S246 is “reach”, one of the reach-losing variation pattern type determination tables 204A to 204C is selected as a use table in step S247. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S246 is “non-reach”, one of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 203A to 203C is selected as a use table in step S248. Thereafter, based on the random value MR4 extracted in step S249, the variation pattern type is determined in step S250.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern type in step S250, one of the loss variation pattern determination tables 208A and 208B and the big hit variation pattern determination tables 209A and 209B is selected as a use table in step S251. Thereafter, a variation pattern is determined in step S253 based on the random number value MR5 extracted in step S252. Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, after determining the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types with reference to the variation pattern type determination table selected based on the prior determination result or the reach determination result, The variation pattern of the decorative design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. Thereby, since the determination ratio of the variation pattern type and the determination ratio of the variation pattern can be set separately, the design change related to the distribution of the variation pattern type and the variation pattern can be easily performed.

  As an example, for the reach loss variation pattern shown in FIG. 8, a variation pattern PA3-6 for executing the reach operation α and performing the effect operation of “quasi-continuous 4 times” as the “main designated effect” is added. In this case, in the loss variation pattern determination table 208B shown in FIG. 18B, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be allocated to the variation pattern PA3-6 according to the variation pattern type CA2-2. Good. On the other hand, in the reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 204A to 204C shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, it is not necessary to change the allocation of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type for the variation pattern type CA2-2. Good. Thereby, the reliability of the reach corresponding to the reach effect α is not changed before and after the addition of the change pattern PA3-6, and a new change pattern PA3-6 for executing the reach effect α is added. Can do.

  When an effect operation of “main slip” is executed by any of the main slip pattern MS1-1 to main slip pattern MS1-3 and main slip pattern MS2-1, after all symbols change is started, After the decorative symbols other than the symbol number “9” are derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display portion 5L of “”, the decorative symbol display portion 5R of “right” (the main slip pattern MS1-1 to main slip pattern MS1-3 ) Or the “middle” decorative symbol display section 5C (in the case of the main sliding pattern MS2-1), the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” may be temporarily displayed temporarily. And after the change effect which changes a stop symbol with a different effect mode according to each main slip pattern is performed, a definite ornament design is derived and displayed. That is, the decoration included in the special identification information in any of the decorative symbol display units of the plurality of decorative symbol display units, such as either the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R or the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C. Depending on whether the symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to execute any one of the changed effects as a plurality of types of special effects having different effects. In this way, it is possible to increase the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” by the change effect, to prevent the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” from decreasing in a short period of time, and to improve the interest of the game. it can. Moreover, the change effect can be executed in various effect modes to enhance the effect of the change effect.

  In addition, in the case where the effect operation of “main slip” is executed by any of the main slip pattern MS1-1 to main slip pattern MS1-3, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is determined as the right temporary stop symbol. The determination ratio is any of the determination ratios in which an arbitrary decorative symbol whose symbol number is other than “9” (any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “1” to “8”) is determined as the right temporary stop symbol. Random values are obtained in the temporary stop TM1-1, temporary stop TM1-2, and temporary stop TM1-4 included in the pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination table 257 shown in FIGS. It is assigned to each decorative pattern. When the “main slip” effect operation by the main slip pattern MS2-1 is executed, in step S694 shown in FIG. 49, the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” is determined as the intermediate temporary stop symbol. That is, in the case of the main slip pattern MS2-1, the determination ratio at which the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is determined as the intermediate temporary stop symbol is 100%, and the symbol number is other than “9”. Arbitrary decorative symbols (any of decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “1” to “8”) are higher than any of the determination ratios (0%) determined as intermediate temporary stop symbols. As a result, even after a decorative symbol other than the symbol number “9” included in the normal identification information is first derived and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L or the like, the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R is displayed. And the “middle” decorative symbol display section 5C and the like, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” included in the special identification information is derived and displayed, and a sense of expectation that a specific effect such as the effect of “main sliding” will be executed. It can be raised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  During the variable display of the decorative pattern by any one of the fluctuation pattern PC3-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC3-2, the fluctuation pattern PC4-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC4-2, the fluctuation pattern PC5-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2, special identification is performed. After a decorative design with the symbol number “9” included in the information is derived and displayed in the reach display state, a specific performance operation such as a fusion performance in which the decorative design included in the special identification information overlaps and merges is executed. Reach production is performed by reproducing and displaying moving images. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the game by enhancing the effect when the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” included in the special identification information is derived and displayed in the reach display state.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbols by any one of the variation pattern PC3-1, the variation pattern PC4-1, and the variation pattern PC5-1, the special identification information is displayed on the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5C. The “left middle reach” in which the decorative design included in is derived and displayed in the reach display state. On the other hand, during the variable display of the decorative symbols by any one of the variation pattern PC3-2, the variation pattern PC4-2, and the variation pattern PC5-2, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R are displayed. The decorative pattern included in the special identification information becomes “left and right reach” derived and displayed in the reach display state. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbol display units 5L and 5C of “left” and “middle” (variation pattern) is used as a combination of the decorative symbol display units from which the decorative symbols included in the special identification information are derived and displayed in the reach display state. PC3-1, variation pattern PC4-1, variation pattern PC5-1) or a combination of “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R (variation pattern PC3-2, variation) There are a plurality of types of combinations including different decorative symbol display portions, such as a pattern PC4-2 or a variation pattern PC5-2. That is, when the decorative symbols included in the special identification information are derived and displayed in a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols included in the special identification information are displayed. As the decorative symbol display unit from which the symbol is derived and displayed, it is one of a plurality of types of derived display modes including different decorative symbol display units. Thereby, the decoration design included in the special identification information can be derived and displayed in various display modes, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative pattern by any one of the fluctuation pattern PC 3-2, the fluctuation pattern PC 4-2 and the fluctuation pattern PC 5-2, the decoration symbols are derived and displayed in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right”. The decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the special derivation order, and the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L is derived and displayed as the special identifying information, and then the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C is normally identified. After the decorative symbol that is the information is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol that is the special identification information is derived and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R, resulting in “left and right reach”. Thus, even when the special identification information is not derived and displayed on the “middle” ornament symbol display portion 5C from which the ornament symbol is derived and displayed second, the “right” ornament symbol display portion on which the ornament symbol is derived and displayed next. When the special identification information is derived and displayed at 5R, the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state. This makes it possible to maintain the expectation that the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state and the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” for a long period of time, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, even when a decorative symbol that is normal identification information is derived and displayed on some decorative symbol display units, the decorative symbol that is special identification information can be derived and displayed in a reach display state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the unexpectedness of the display and the joy of the player.

  When the “sub-sliding” effect operation is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination fixed decorative symbol or the random chance symbol TC1 to TC4 is derived and displayed, After all symbols change has started, the decorative symbols other than the symbol number “9” are temporarily stopped on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R, and stopped at the right symbol change effect by scroll display etc. The final decorative symbol is derived and displayed as the right last stop symbol. Then, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined and displayed as non-reach combination finalized decorative symbols and confirmation chance items TC1 to TC4. The decorative symbol is configured not to include the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9”. Further, when the “sub-sliding” effect operation is not executed, the decorative symbol is not temporarily displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R, and the final decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol is displayed. Derived and displayed. Thus, for example, when a predetermined effect operation such as an effect operation of “main slip” or an effect operation during variable display of decorative symbols by the variation pattern PC 3-1 is not executed, the symbol number included in the special identification information is “9”. ”Is not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of joy from being lowered when the decorative pattern included in the special identification information is derived and displayed.

  Among the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol display portion in which the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” included in the special identification information is derived and displayed. As the number increases, the random value MR4 is assigned to each variation pattern type in the reach-losing variation pattern type determination tables 204A to 204C, or the big hit variation pattern type determination table so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. 205A to 205C, 206A to 206C, and 207A to 207C are assigned a random value MR4 for each variation pattern type, each random pattern MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern in the loss variation pattern determination table 208B, and each jackpot variation pattern determination table 209A, 209B Random value M for fluctuation pattern Including 5 allocation is predefined. Then, on the side of the effect control board 12, the final stop symbol is determined by executing the final stop symbol determination process in step S501 shown in FIG. 45 based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Determine the combination of symbols. Further, in the changing effect determination process executed in step S502, the temporary stop symbol derived and displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol by executing the pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination process in step S641 shown in FIG. To decide. Thus, when the decorative symbols are sequentially derived and displayed, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” can be increased step by step, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the special identification information includes a plurality of types of decorative symbols variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. As a decorative symbol whose symbol number is “9”, it is displayed side by side in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the above description, it is assumed that one type of decorative pattern formed to include characters and the like constituting different identification information so as to have a specific meaning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it has a specific meaning by being displayed side by side in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols formed in this way include two or more types of decorative symbols variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. You may be made to do.

  As an example, in addition to decorative symbols that are formed to include characters that constitute different identification information, such as “Large”, “Hit”, and “Ri” characters that constitute the character string of “Big hit”, the symbol number A decoration formed by including characters constituting different identification information such as “do”, “la”, and “mu” constituting a character string of “drum” as ornamental patterns having “10” The symbols may be included in the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is the first special identification information, and the decorative symbol with the symbol number “10” is the second special identification information.

  And in the variable display of the decoration pattern by either of the fluctuation pattern PC5-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC5-2 shown in FIG. 9, the decoration design whose design number is “10”, which is the second special identification information, is used as the confirmed decoration design. It may be derived and displayed. In this case, during the variable display of the decorative pattern by any one of the variation pattern PC3-1 and variation pattern PC3-2 shown in FIG. 8 and the variation pattern PC4-1 and variation pattern PC4-2 shown in FIG. After the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9”, which is the special identification information, is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the reach effect γ1 is executed. On the other hand, during the variable display of the decorative pattern by any one of the variation pattern PC5-1 and the variation pattern PC5-2 shown in FIG. 9, the decorative symbol whose symbol number is “10” as the second special identification information is displayed. After being derived and displayed in the reach display state, reach effect γ2 is executed. Here, when the reach effect γ1 is executed, the variable display result may be “big hit” (in the case of either the variation pattern PC4-1 or the variation pattern PC4-2), and the variable display result is “ It may be “lost” (in the case of any of the fluctuation pattern PC3-1 and the fluctuation pattern PC3-2). On the other hand, when the reach effect γ2 is executed, the variable display result is “big hit” (in the case of either the variation pattern PC5-1 or the variation pattern PC5-2), and the variable display result is “lost”. There is nothing. Thus, depending on which of the first special identification information and the second special identification information is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the possibility (probability) that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is different. Alternatively, the random number MR4 is assigned to each variation pattern type in the reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 204A to 204C, or the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 205A to 205C, 206A so that the reach reliability corresponding to each reach effect is different. ˜206C, 207A to 207C, random number value MR4 for each variation pattern type, random variation value MR5 for each variation pattern in loss variation pattern determination table 208B, random number value for each variation pattern in jackpot variation pattern determination tables 209A, 209B M Including 5 of allocation, it is sufficient that predetermined. This improves the fun of the game by varying the expectation that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the decorative symbols that are the multiple types of special identification information is derived and displayed in the reach display state. Can be made. In addition, when the reach effect γ1 is executed, a decorative symbol serving as the second special identification information may be derived and displayed. In this case, when the variable display result is “losing” (when either the variation pattern PC3-1 or the variation pattern PC3-2), when the variable display result is “big hit” (variation) When the pattern is either the pattern PC4-1 or the variation pattern PC4-2), the proportion of the determined decorative symbols determined for the first special identification information and the second special identification information may be different. For example, when the final stop symbol is determined in step S614 shown in FIG. 46 in response to designation of either the fluctuation pattern PC4-1 or the fluctuation pattern PC4-2 by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command is used. The second special identification at a higher rate than when the final stop symbol is determined in steps S607 and S608 shown in FIG. 46 in response to the designation of either the fluctuation pattern PC3-1 or the fluctuation pattern PC3-2. The decorative symbol having the symbol number “10” as information may be determined as the final stop symbol.

  In the above embodiment, when a game ball that has entered (start winning prize) into the start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6 is detected by the start opening switch 22, a special symbol or a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It has been described that the starting condition for execution is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of start winning holes are provided, and a plurality of display devices for variably displaying special symbols are provided, depending on which start winning hole the game ball enters. Alternatively, variable display of different special symbols may be performed. As an example, instead of the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6, a normal winning ball apparatus that forms a first starting winning opening and a normal variable winning ball apparatus that forms a second starting winning opening are provided, and the first starting winning opening is provided. The entered game ball is detected by the first start port switch, and the game ball that has entered the second start winning port is detected by the second start port switch. Here, the normal winning ball apparatus forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member, while the normal variable winning ball apparatus is a normally variable ball in the above embodiment. Similarly to the winning ball apparatus 6, for example, an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to form a 2nd start prize opening | mouth with a tulip-type accessory (normal electric accessory). It should be noted that the normal variable winning ball device here has a possibility that a game ball may enter the second start winning opening even when it is in a normally open state, but more than when it is in an expanded open state. It may be configured to be low, or in a normally open state, it may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening by closing the second starting winning opening.

  Further, when a game ball that has entered the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch, a first start condition for executing variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device is established. . On the other hand, when a game ball that has entered the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch, the second start condition for executing variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device is To establish. In the image display device 5, “left”, “middle” correspond to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device. ”,“ Right ”decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R may be variably displayed.

  Then, when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device is started, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types, and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device is determined. A variation pattern type determination table, a variation pattern determination table, etc. so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern differs depending on whether the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types when the special figure game used is started You may set the table data which comprises. As an example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 205A and 205B shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 206A and 206B shown in FIGS. 16D and 16E, and FIG. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 207A and 207B shown in (B) and (B), the variation pattern type CA3-1 depends on whether the special game using the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type associated with each of the variation pattern types CA3-6 may be assigned differently. As another example, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table 209A shown in FIG. 19A, the variation pattern type CA3 depends on whether the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. The random number MR5 for determining a variation pattern associated with each variation pattern included in each of the -1 to variation patterns CA3-6 may be assigned differently. As a result, the reliability of the reach is made different depending on whether the special game using the first special symbol or the special game using the second special symbol is started, and the effect of the reach is changed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by having.

  Or, when starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types, and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device Configure the jackpot type determination table, etc. so that the ratio of the jackpot type determined as “surprising” differs depending on whether the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types when the special figure game used is started Table data may be set. As a result, the player's expectation that the game will be controlled to the two round big hit state depending on which of the special figure game using the first special symbol and the special figure game using the second special symbol is started. Differentiating and improving the fun of the game. In particular, when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device is started, the big hit type is not determined to be “surprise”, for example, the second start prize such as the probability variation state or the short time state. In the period in which the mouth is easily controlled to be in the expanded and open state, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being lowered by the “big hit” type being “surprise”, and it is possible to increase the frequency at which the prize balls are paid out in the probability variation state and the short time state.

  Alternatively, when a special symbol game using the first special symbol display device by the first special symbol display device is started, the final stop symbol or the temporary stop symbol is determined, and the second special symbol display device by the second special symbol display device is used. The final stop symbol and the temporary stop symbol are determined when the special symbol game is started, so that the proportion of the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” as the special identification information is derived and displayed is different. You may set the table data which comprises a symbol determination table, a temporary stop symbol determination table, etc. As an example, in the table of temporary stop TM1-1 and temporary stop TM1-2 shown in FIG. 32 and the table of temporary stop TM1-4 shown in FIG. 33, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is used. Depending on whether the special symbol game is started, the random number value for determining the temporary stop symbol for sliding associated with the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” may be varied. Note that it is only necessary to be notified by the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 whether the special game using the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. In addition, the ratio of deriving and displaying the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” as the special identification information may be varied by setting the table data constituting the variation pattern type determination table. As an example, in the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 205B shown in FIG. 16B, the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 206B shown in FIG. 17B, and the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 207B shown in FIG. Depending on whether the special game using the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started, the fluctuation pattern type determination disorder associated with the fluctuation pattern type CA3-5 or the fluctuation pattern type CA3-6 The allocation of the numerical value MR4 is made different. Here, the variation pattern type CA3-5 includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” as the final stop symbols, such as the variation pattern PC4-1 and the variation pattern PC4-2. Variation patterns that are derived and displayed side by side in the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are included. Also, in the variation pattern type CA3-6, decorations of the symbol number “9” such as the variation pattern PC5-1 and the variation pattern PC5-2 are ornaments of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as the final stop symbols. Variation patterns to be derived and displayed side by side in the symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are included. Therefore, with the setting of the variation pattern type determination table, the decorative symbol with the symbol number “9” is displayed according to whether the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. The ratio to be derived and displayed as the final stop symbol can be varied. In this way, a decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” as special identification information is derived and displayed depending on whether the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the ratio to be played and changing the effect of the effect when the special identification information is derived and displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a normal derivation order in which the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the order of “left” → “right” → “middle”, and a special in which the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right”. In the above description, two types of derivation orders, such as derivation order, are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more derivation orders may be provided. As an example, the special derivation order includes a first special derivation order for deriving and displaying decorative symbols in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right”, and decorative symbols in the order of “right” → “left” → “middle”. And a second special derivation order for deriving and displaying. And in the variation pattern which becomes "left middle reach", such as variation pattern PC3-1 shown in FIG. 8, variation pattern PC4-1, and variation pattern PC5-1 shown in FIG. 9, the decorative design is in the first special derivation order. What is necessary is just to make it display and display. On the other hand, in the variation patterns that are “left and right reach” such as the variation pattern PC3-2 shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern PC4-2, and the variation pattern PC5-2 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to make it derive and display in order. Note that the correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and the derivation order is not limited to this, and may be any predetermined correspondence relationship. Alternatively, in accordance with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the derivation order of the decorative symbols to one of a plurality of types. It may be.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the effect operation of “main slip” and the effect operation of “sub-slip” are set to be executable during the variable display of decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the “main slip” effect operation and the “sub-slip” effect operation may be set to be executable. As an example, when only the effect operation of “main slip” is set to be executable, the same change effect as the effect operation of “main slip” in the above embodiment may be performed. A change effect similar to the “sub-slip” effect operation in the embodiment may also be executed as the “main slip” effect operation. Further, when only the “sub-slip” effect operation is set to be executable, the same change effect as the “sub-slip” effect operation in the above embodiment may be performed. In addition, the change effect similar to the “main slip” effect operation in the above embodiment may also be executed as the “sub-slip” effect operation. In this case, the change effect is executed. Depending on whether or not, it is necessary to set the execution period of the change effect so that the variable display time of the decorative symbols does not change.

  When the decorative symbol that is the special identification information is derived and displayed, for example, the period during which the decorative symbol is decelerated (slow fluctuation) is longer than that when the decorative symbol that is the normal identification information is derived and displayed. An effect operation as an effect may be executed. In this case, it may be determined whether or not to perform the roaring effect at a predetermined determination ratio even when a decorative symbol serving as normal identification information is derived and displayed. As an example, when the decorative symbol that is the special identification information is first derived and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, the decorative symbol that is the normal identification information is displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L. Thus, it is only necessary to make a determination that the effect operation that will be a roaring effect is to be executed at a higher determination ratio than in the case of being derived and displayed for the first time. In this case, for example, whether or not to execute the roaring effect when a predetermined roaring effect condition is satisfied, for example, that a predetermined decorative symbol is derived and displayed among a plurality of types of decorative symbols serving as normal identification information This determination may be made. As a specific example of the squeak effect condition, as a final stop symbol, a decorative symbol one frame before the special identification information (for example, a decorative symbol whose symbol number is “8”) or a decorative symbol one frame after (for example, a symbol number) It is only necessary to determine in advance that an ornamental design with “1” is derived and displayed. The determination as to whether or not to execute such an effect may be performed by the CPU 111 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, or the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. 120 CPUs 131 may perform this. For example, a variation pattern in which an effect operation serving as a roaring effect is executed in advance, and the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 determines any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns, thereby producing an effect operation serving as a roaring effect. It may be determined whether or not to execute. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display unit on which the roaring effect is executed may be only the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L from which the decorative symbol is first derived and displayed. Alternatively, not only the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L but also all or part of the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5C and 5R may be configured to perform a staging effect. May be.

  In the above embodiment, when the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the normal derivation order in the order of “left” → “right” → “middle”, any of the main slip patterns MS1-1 to main slip patterns MS1-3 is used. The “right” decorative symbol display section 5R may display the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” as special identification information so as to be temporarily stopped and displayed, and the main slip pattern MS2-1 displays “middle”. In the above description, the decorative symbol display unit 5 </ b> C has been described so that the decorative symbol having the symbol number “9” as special identification information is derived and displayed so as to be temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the normal derivation order, for example, a plurality of decorative symbol display portions such as “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5C and 5R. In other words, a decorative symbol that becomes special identification information may be derived and displayed. As an example, in the main slip pattern MS1-3, when the right temporary stop symbol determined in step S685 shown in FIG. 49 is a decorative symbol serving as special identification information, special identification is performed at a predetermined determination ratio in step S689. The decorative symbol that is information is determined to be the intermediate temporary stop symbol. In this case, depending on whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit”, the ratio of determining the decorative symbol as the special identification information as the intermediate temporary stop symbol may be varied. . For example, in the process of step S689 shown in FIG. 49, in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, a larger number of random values than the case where the variable display result is “lost” It is only necessary to determine the decorative symbol that will be the intermediate temporary stop symbol with reference to the temporary stop symbol determination table that is allocated so as to be associated with the determination result of the decorative symbol that becomes the intermediate temporary stop symbol. In this way, when the decorative symbol serving as the special identification information is derived and displayed on the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5C and 5R during the variable display of the decorative symbol, only the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R is displayed. The possibility (probability) that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may be increased as compared with the case in which the decorative symbol serving as the special identification information is derived and displayed. As a result, even when a decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the normal derivation order, the variable display result is expected to be a “big hit” as the number of decorative symbol display portions from which the decorative symbol serving as special identification information is derived and displayed increases. A feeling can be raised and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the final stop symbol determination process in step S501 shown in FIG. 45, or the changing effect in step S502. It has been described that the stop symbol, the effect control pattern, and the like are determined by executing the determination process, executing the process of step S503, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of CPUs mounted respectively on a plurality of control boards provided for controlling the rendering operation can determine the rendering state, stop symbol, rendering control pattern, etc. , It may be executed in a shared manner.

  As an example, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 71 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. On the display control board 16, a display control CPU 180, a ROM 181, a RAM 182, a random number circuit 183, and an I / O 184 are mounted. In this case, since the display control CPU 180 mounted on the display control board 16 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The displayed display control unit 121 may not be provided. In the display control board 16, for example, the display control CPU 180 executes a program read from the ROM 181, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU 180 reads fixed data from the ROM 181, the display control CPU 180 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 182 and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU 180 loads the RAM 182 into the RAM 182. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for the display control CPU 180 to receive input of various signals from the outside of the display control board 16 via the I / O 184, and the display control CPU 180 for the I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board 16 via the O184 is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU 180, for example, based on a display control command from the effect control board 12 or an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12, the final stop in step S 501 shown in FIG. 45. By executing all or part of the symbol determination process, the changing effect determination process in step S502, and the process in step S503, at least a part of the determination of the stop symbol and the effect control pattern is executed. It may be. Further, the display control CPU 180 executes all or a part of the processes in steps S160 to S165 shown in FIG. 44, thereby displaying the effect image on the image display device 5 including the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may make it control production | movement operation by. The display control CPU 180 only needs to execute any part of the processing executed by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 in the above embodiment. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 may execute processing for comprehensively controlling the effect operation.

  Further, the functions of the sound control unit 122 and the lamp control unit 123 may be provided in a voice control board, a lamp control board, or the like as a control board provided independently of the effect control board 12. In this case, the sound control board and the lamp control board are not equipped with a microcomputer including a control CPU, and the sound and sound effects are produced by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Processing for controlling various effects such as output control and lighting control of lamps and decorative LEDs may be executed. Alternatively, any part of the processing executed by the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 in the above embodiment is executed by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board. You may be made to do. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like, is executed on any control board. Any combination may be used.

  In the embodiment described above, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided. In the above description, it is assumed that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so that a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a temporary stop symbol or a final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, the “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” The decorative symbols may be displayed in a stopped state, and the final decorative symbols that are the temporary stop symbols and the final stopped symbols may be stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state is controlled. After the two round big hit state ends, the probability change state It was described as being controlled by However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate”, or in addition to this case, the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “ A case where the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” may be provided. In this case, the special figure display result determination table 200 is configured to include table data for assigning the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result to the small hit determination value data corresponding to the variable display result of “small hit”. It only has to be done. The jackpot type determination table 201 may be configured to include table data that assigns the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type to the jackpot type “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”.

  Then, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the variable winning operation for opening the big winning opening is performed as a two-time open game in the same manner as the two round big hit state. After the variable winning operation is completed, the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continued, and the gaming state is not changed. As a result, even if the player recognizes that an open game will be performed twice, the player's expectation on whether or not the game will be in a probable state after the end of the two-time open game is increased, and the gaming interest is improved. be able to.

  Also, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state in the same way as the big hit type is “surprising”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. As a result, even if the player can recognize that the player will be in the 2-round jackpot state, the player's expectation for the gaming state controlled after the end of the two-round jackpot state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the time-short state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short time state, it has been described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the start winning opening and making it easier to establish the start condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the advantageous opening control is performed to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the start winning opening. A state and a high-accuracy low-base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the advantageous release control is not performed may be included. In the short-time state, the variable display time for special symbols and the like is reduced, and the low-accuracy base state where advantageous release control is performed, and the variable display time for special symbols and the like is shortened, but advantageous release control is performed And a low probability low base state may be included. As an example, depending on whether the big hit type is "probability change" or "surprise", after the big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state. May be. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise”, the ratio that is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends , They may be different from each other.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer A form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4 ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6 ... Normal variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Signal relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22 ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 81, 82 ... Solenoid 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101 ... Switch circuit 102 ... Solenoid circuits 111, 131 ... CPU
112, 132 ... ROM
113, 133 ... RAM
114: random number circuit 115, 136: input / output port 120 ... production control microcomputer 121 ... display control unit 122 ... sound control unit 123 ... lamp control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variable display patterns in which a variable display mode of identification information is defined;
Variable display pattern selection means for selecting any variable display pattern from the plurality of variable display patterns;
Variable display control means for variably displaying identification information according to the variable display pattern selected by the variable display pattern selection means,
The variable display pattern selection means is based on the fact that when the specific mode is derived and displayed, the determination means determines that the advantageous state is not controlled in the variable display of the identification information performed a predetermined number of times thereafter. Continuously selecting a variable display pattern from a specific variable display pattern group having fewer types of variable display patterns than the plurality of variable display patterns,
Identification information is variably displayed on the variable display portion of the plurality of rows, said plurality of rows specific symbol to form a Driven string by be displayed side by side identification information indicating different character each other in the variable display portion of And identification information other than the special identification information, including normal identification information that results in a specific display by displaying the same identification information side by side on the variable display section of the plurality of columns,
In the case where the normal identification information is derived and displayed on the first variable display unit from which the identification information is derived and displayed first among the plurality of columns of variable display units, the identification information is derived and displayed on the plurality of columns of variable display units. First derivation display control means for performing in the first derivation display order;
When the special identification information is derived and displayed on the first variable display unit, a second derived display different from the first derived display order is used for the identification information derived display on the variable display unit of the plurality of columns. Second derivation display control means that can be performed in order;
A specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect after the identification information is first derived and displayed on the first variable display unit and before the variable display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the special identification information is derived and displayed at a higher rate than the normal identification information on the second variable display unit different from the first variable display unit. Special derivation display control means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images